2023 - Guidelines - For ATC Classification & DDD Assignment PDF

Guidelines for
ATC classification
and DDD assignment
2023
ISSN 1726-4898
ISBN 978-82-8406-343-0
Suggested citation: WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology,

Guidelines for ATC classification and DDD assignment 2023. Oslo, Norway, 2022
© Copyright
WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology, Oslo, Norway.
Use of all or parts of the material requires reference to the WHO Collaborating
Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology. Copying and distribution for commercial
purposes is not allowed. Changing or manipulating the material is not allowed.
Guidelines for
ATC classification
and DDD assignment
26th edition
WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology

Norwegian Institute of Public Health
P.O.Box 222 Skøyen
N-0213 Oslo
Norway
Telephone: (47) 21078160

E-mail: whocc@fhi.no
Website: www.whocc.no
Previous editions:
1990: Guidelines for ATC classification1)
1991: Guidelines for DDD1)
1993: Guidelines for ATC classification
1993: Guidelines for DDD
1996: Guidelines for ATC classification and DDD assignment
1) A co-publication between the WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology and the Nordic
Council on Medicines
PREFACE
The Anatomical Therapeutic Chemical (ATC) classification system and the Defined
Daily Dose (DDD) as a measuring unit are recommended by the WHO for drug
utilization monitoring and research. The system is widely used internationally and
the number of users is increasing. The purpose of preparing guidelines is to make
information about the ATC/DDD system available to the users.
The members of the WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics
Methodology have given expert advice and comments on the work with these
guidelines.
This edition of the Guidelines for ATC classification and DDD assignment is based
on the ATC classification index with DDDs valid from January 2023.
The guidelines consist of a general part including information about the procedures
and data requirements for ATC/DDD assignment and alterations. The second part of
the publication, the interpretative guidelines, describes the different ATC levels
down to the 4th level. These guidelines should be consulted whenever the ATC/DDD
system is used for drug utilization monitoring and research. They describe particular
issues, which have been discussed and resolved by consensus of the Working Group.
The Guidelines and the ATC index with DDDs are updated annually. Both
publications can be ordered as electronic or paper copies (English or Spanish
versions) from the Centre (order form, see website www.whocc.no). A pdf
document of the Guidelines and a searchable version of the ATC/DDD index linked to
the text from the Guidelines are available on the website (ATC/DDD index).
We hope this book will prove helpful to the users of the ATC/DDD system.
Suggested improvements can be addressed to the WHO Collaborating Centre in
Oslo.
Oslo, December 2022
WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology

Norwegian Institute of Public Health
Staff of the Centre
Gry Vibeke Bakken, MScPharm, PhD

Hege Salvesen Blix, MScPharm, PhD
Live Storehagen Dansie, MScPharm, MPhil Int Comm Health
Ignatios Ioakeim Skoufa, MD
Irene Litleskare, MScPharm
Mohammad Nouri Sharikabad, MScPharm, PhD
Kristine Olsen, MScPharm
Tove Granum, secretary
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. Introduction ...................................................................................... 10
A. History of the ATC/DDD system .................................................... 10
B. Present Organizational responsibility for the ATC/DDD system ....10
1. WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology ...10
2. WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics
Methodology........................................................................... 11
C. The purpose of the ATC/DDD system ............................................ 14
II. The anatomical therapeutic chemical (ATC) classification system ...... 14

A. Structure and nomenclature ......................................................... 14
B. Inclusion and exclusion criteria ..................................................... 15
C. Principles for classification ............................................................ 16
1. Therapeutic use or pharmacological class ............................... 16
2. Only one ATC code for each route of administration ...............17
3. More than one ATC code for a medicinal substance ................17
4. New ATC groups and “other” groups (X groups) ......................18
5. Other general principles .......................................................... 18
D. Classification of combination products ......................................... 19
E. Principles for changing ATC codes ................................................. 21
F. The EphMRA classification system ................................................ 22
III. DDD (Defined Daily Dose) .................................................................. 23

A. Definition and general considerations........................................... 23
B. Principles for DDD assignment ...................................................... 23
1. General principles .................................................................... 23
2. Combination products ............................................................. 25
3. Other factors ........................................................................... 27
a) Fixed doses.............................................................................. 27
b) Depot formulations ................................................................. 27
c) Intermittent dosing ................................................................. 27
d) Duration of treatment ............................................................. 27
4. Selection of units ..................................................................... 28
7
C. Pediatric DDD ................................................................................ 29
D. Principles for reviewing and changing DDD ................................... 29
E. Description of other drug utilization metrics ................................. 31
IV. Uses of the ATC/DDD methodology ................................................... 32

A Implementation and maintenance of the ATC/DDD methodology 32
B. Drug utilization.............................................................................. 33
1. Data sources ............................................................................ 34
2. DDD indicators and interpretations ......................................... 35
C. Drug Safety Assessment ................................................................ 37
D. Drug information........................................................................... 38
E. Drug costs, pricing, reimbursement and cost-containment...........38
F. Pharmaceutical marketing purposes ............................................. 39
V. Procedures and data requirements for ATC/DDD assignment and

alterations ......................................................................................... 40
A. Requests for ATC classification ...................................................... 40
1. Procedures and timing ............................................................. 40
2. Data requirements for submission........................................... 42
B. Requests for ATC changes ............................................................. 43
C. Requests for DDD assignment ....................................................... 44
D. Requests for DDD changes ............................................................ 46
VI. Description of ATC index with DDDs .................................................. 47
VII. Other ATC classification systems ....................................................... 48

A. ATCvet classification...................................................................... 48
B. ATC herbal classification ............................................................... 48
VIII. ATC/DDD Interpretative guidelines ................................................... 49
8
ATC system main groups ............................................................................... 50
A Alimentary tract and metabolism.......................................................... 51
B Blood and blood forming organs ........................................................... 81
C Cardiovascular system .......................................................................... 91
D Dermatologicals .................................................................................. 113
G Genito urinary system and sex hormones ........................................... 129
H Systemic hormonal preparations, excl. sex hormones and insulins ..... 142
J Antiinfectives for systemic use............................................................ 149
L Antineoplastic and immunomodulating agents................................... 166
M Musculo-skeletal system ..................................................................... 176
N Nervous system .................................................................................. 185
P Antiparasitic products, insecticides and repellents ............................. 205
R Respiratory system ............................................................................. 212
S Sensory organs .................................................................................... 225
V Various ................................................................................................ 234
List of terms .............................................................................................. 248
9
I. INTRODUCTION
A. History of the ATC/DDD system
The field of Drug Utilization Research (DUR) began attracting attention in the
1960’s. This followed the publication of a breakthrough study on drug
consumption from 1966-1967 (pioneered by the WHO Regional Office for Europe)
which further exemplified the importance and applicability of DUR (ref: Engel A,
Siderius P. The consumption of drugs. Report on a study, 1966-1967. WHO
Regional Office for Europe, Copenhagen 1968 (EURO 3101). In addition, the WHO
symposium in 1969 highlighted the need for an internationally accepted
classification system for drug utilization studies. As a result the Drug Utilization
Research Group (DURG) was established and entrusted with the development of
internationally applicable methods for DUR. Inspired by this interest, the
Anatomical Therapeutic Chemical (ATC) classification was developed in Norway as
a modification and extension of the European Pharmaceutical Market Research
Association (EphMRA) classification system.
In order to measure drug use, it is important to have both a classification system

and a unit of measurement. To deal with the objections against traditional units
of measurement, a technical unit of measurement called the Defined Daily Dose
(DDD) was developed for use in drug utilization studies.
Several decades of experience using ATC/DDD methodology have demonstrated

its suitability in drug utilization monitoring and research. The increase in number
of users indicates the usefulness of the system.
B. Present Organizational responsibility for the ATC/DDD system
1. WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology
Access to standardised and validated information on drug use is essential to allow

audit of patterns of drug utilization, identification of problems, educational or
other interventions and monitoring of the outcomes of the interventions.In 1981,
the ATC/DDD system was recommended by the WHO as the international
standard for drug utilization studies, and in 1982 the WHO Collaborating Centre
for Drug Statistics Methodology was established and given the responsibility for
coordinating the development and use of the ATC/DDD system. In 1996, the
Centre was recognized as a global centre. This was seen as important to allow
close integration of international drug utilization studies and WHO’s initiatives to
10
achieve universal access to needed drugs and rational use of drugs particularly in
developing countries. Access to standardised and validated information on drug
use is essential to allow audit of patterns of drug utilization, identification of
problems, educational or other interventions and monitoring of the outcomes of
the interventions.
The Centre is located at the Norwegian Institute of Public Health and is funded by
the Norwegian Government. The first agreement was drawn up by WHO
Headquarters with the Government of Norway in 1996. The latest redesignation
of the Department of Drug Statistics, Norwegian Institute of Public Health as
WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology, was in 2020. All
activities related to ATC/DDD classification are conducted in accordance with the
policies determined by WHO.
The Terms of References (TOR) and activities are described in detail in the
redesignation documents of the WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics
Metholology. According to the TORs, the Centre has under the guidance of WHO
the following activities:
- Assignment of new ATC codes and DDDs based on requests from users in
different countries
- Review and revise existing ATC codes and DDDs based on proposals from users
of the ATC/DDD system
- Handle requests and guide users regarding the use and misuse of the ATC/DDD
system
- To provide specialized training on the use of the ATC/DDD methodology to
provide technical support to countries in setting up their national medicines
classification
2. WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology
In 1996, when the decision to globalise the ATC/DDD system was taken, the WHO
Division of Drug Management and Policies established the WHO International
Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology. The International Working
Group includes 12 expert members selected by WHO Headquarters to represent a
wide range of geographical and professional backgrounds, including clinical
pharmacology, clinical medicine, international public health, drug utilization and
drug regulation. All six WHO regions are represented in the group. The WHO
Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology receives expert advice from
the Working Group. The tasks of the Working Group are:
11
- To continue the scientific development of the ATC/DDD system.
- To discuss and approve all new ATC codes, DDD assignments and alterations to
existing ATC codes and DDDs.
- To develop further the use of the ATC/DDD system as an international standard

for drug utilization studies.
- To revise as necessary the guidelines for assignment and change of ATC codes
and DDDs.
- To revise as necessary the procedures for applications for assignment of and

changes to ATC codes and DDDs to ensure they are consistent and transparent.
- To assess the sources and availability of statistics on drug use internationally,

and to encourage the systematic collection of comprehensive drug use statistics
in all countries and regions using the ATC/DDD system as the international
standard.
- To develop methods, manuals and guidelines for the practical application and
appropriate use of the ATC/DDD system in drug utilization studies in a variety of
settings, particularly those applicable to developing countries.
- To work with groups involved in rational drug use initiatives to integrate

methods for measurement of drug use in assessing needs and outcomes of
interventions with the aim of improving drug use.
The International Working Group meets twice annually. A teleconference may

replace one of the two annual meetings. Members are required to complete a
WHO declaration of interest form before the meeting. Observers from the WHO
Collaborating Centre for International Drug Monitoring and the International
Federation of Pharmaceutical Manufacturers Association are invited to attend the
meetings of the International Working Group. An open session is arranged prior
to one of the annual meetings to which any interested party can register (see
further information below).
Decisions on ATC classification or DDD assignment from the meetings are

published on the website of the WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics
Methodology and in the publication WHO Drug Information. Any decision on a
new or revised ATC classification or DDD assignment is first published as
temporary. Any interested party wishing to dispute this decision is invited to
12
comment within a specified deadline after its publication. If there are no
objections to a temporary decision, it will be published as a final decision and
implemented in the next issue of the ATC classification index with DDDs. In case
of any objection, the decision will be reconsidered at the next meeting of the
International Working Group. If a new decision is made at the second meeting,
this decision will be published as temporary and will be open to comments similar
to the first decision. WHO has the final responsibility for the decisions and any
dispute arising in the course of this work must be referred to WHO for final
resolution.
Open Session
An open session is arranged once a year in connection with the meeting of the
WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology. It is
organised in the interest of transparency and consists of a 90 minutes session
prior to the closed decision-making session of the meeting of the Working Group.
Anyone with a legitimate interest in the Anatomical Therapeutic Chemical (ATC)

classification system and Defined Daily Dose (DDD) assignment can attend the
open session. This includes regulatory authorities, the pharmaceutical industry,
academia and non-governmental organisations, and it provides an opportunity to
present additional information to the experts to assist them in their
decisionmaking. It is also an opportunity for the international experts of the
Working Group to exchange ideas and opinions with interested parties.
The open session is not intended to be used as a mechanism to challenge the

decision of the Working Group. The procedures for applying for and commenting
on an ATC classification or a DDD assignment are outlined in these Guidelines (see
section V).
Interested parties are requested to register for the open session at the WHO
Headquarters at least 14 days in advance of the meeting and are requested to
provide a relevant reason for attending. WHO Headquarters will restrict the time
allowed for each presentation in order to keep the duration of the open session
within 90 minutes. Information on these meetings are made available on the
WHO website at www.who.int/medicines.
13
C. The purpose of the ATC/DDD system
The purpose of the ATC/DDD system is to serve as a tool for drug utilization
monitoring and research in order to improve the quality of drug use. One
component of this is the presentation and comparison of drug consumption
statistics at international and other levels.
A major aim of the Centre and Working Group is to maintain stable ATC codes
and DDDs over time to allow trends in drug consumption to be studied without
the complication of frequent changes to the system. There is a strong reluctance
to make changes to classifications or DDDs where such changes are requested for
reasons not directly related to drug consumption studies. For this reason the
ATC/DDD system by itself is not suitable for guiding decisions about
reimbursement, pricing and therapeutic substitution.
It is essential that a tool for drug utilization monitoring and research is able to
cover most medicines available on the market. An important aim of drug
utilization is to monitor rational as well as irrational drug use as an important step
in improving the quality of drug use. The classification of a substance in the
ATC/DDD system is therefore not a recommendation for use and it does not
imply any judgements about efficacy or relative efficacy of drugs and groups of
drugs.
II. THE ANATOMICAL THERAPEUTIC CHEMICAL (ATC)

CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
A. Structure and nomenclature
Structure
In the ATC classification system, the active substances are classified in a hierarchy
with five different levels. The system has fourteen main
anatomical/pharmacological groups or 1st levels. Each ATC main group is divided
into 2nd levels which could be either pharmacological or therapeutic groups. The
3rd and 4th levels are chemical, pharmacological or therapeutic subgroups and
the 5th level is the chemical substance. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th levels are often
used to identify pharmacological subgroups when that is considered more
appropriate than therapeutic or chemical subgroups.
14
The complete classification of metformin illustrates the structure of the code:
A Alimentary tract and metabolism

(1st level, anatomical main group)
A10 Drugs used in diabetes

(2nd level, therapeutic subgroup)
A10B Blood glucose lowering drugs, excl. insulins

(3rd level, pharmacological subgroup)
A10BA Biguanides
(4th level, chemical subgroup)
A10BA02 metformin
(5th level, chemical substance)
Thus, in the ATC system all plain metformin preparations are given the code
A10BA02.
Nomenclature
- International nonproprietary names (INN) are preferred. If INN names are not
assigned, USAN (United States Adopted Name) or BAN (British Approved Name)
names are usually chosen. For herbal medicinal products, Latin names are used.
B. Inclusion and exclusion criteria
The WHO Collaborating Centre in Oslo establishes new entries in the ATC
classification on requests from the users of the system. These include
manufacturers, regulatory agencies and researchers. The coverage of the system
is not comprehensive. A major reason why a substance is not included is that no
request has been received.
Substances which fulfil one of the following criteria will normally be included in
the ATC system:
- new chemical entities or biologicals proposed for licensing. A new chemical
entity is normally not included in the ATC system before an application for
marketing authorisation is ready for submission in at least one country.
- existing well defined chemical entities with an approved marketing
15
authorization in one or more countries. An INN should preferably be
established for the substance. Alternatively other official names, e.g. USAN or
BAN names should be available.
- herbal medicinal products assessed and approved by regulatory authorities

based on dossiers including efficacy, safety, and quality data (e.g. the well-
established use procedure in the EU).
- cell/gene therapy products with an INN, USAN, BAN or another official name.
Other medicinal products are considered on a case by case basis. Preparations

with bacterial lysates as the active substance are classified according to indication
in relevant ATC 4th levels. Complementary, homeopathic and herbal traditional
medicinal products are in general not included in the ATC system.
C. Principles for classification
1. Therapeutic use or pharmacological class
Medicinal products are classified according to the main therapeutic use of the
main active ingredient. The ATC system is, however, not strictly a therapeutic
classification system. In many ATC main groups, pharmacological groups have
been assigned on the 2nd, 3rd and 4th levels allowing drugs with several
therapeutic uses to be included without specifying the main indication. For
example, calcium channel blockers are classified in the pharmacological group
C08 Calcium channel blockers, which avoids specifying whether the main
indication is coronary heart disease or hypertension. Subdivision on the
mechanism of action will, however, often be rather broad (e.g. antidepressants),
since a too detailed classification according to mode of action often will result in
having one substance per subgroup which as far as possible is avoided. Some ATC
groups are subdivided in both chemical and pharmacological groups (e.g. ATC
group J05A - Direct acting antivirals). Preference will be given to establishing a
new pharmacological 4th level rather than a chemical subgroup.
Many medicines are used and approved for two or more indications, while
normally only one ATC code will be assigned. Besides, ATC codes are often
assigned according to the mechanism of action rather than therapy. An ATC group
may therefore include medicines with many different indications, and drugs with
similar therapeutic use may be classified in different groups.
16
2. Only one ATC code for each route of administration
Medicinal substances are classified according to the main therapeutic use or

pharmacological class on the basic principle of only one ATC code for each route
of administration (e.g. oral formulations with similar ingredients and strength will
have the same ATC code). This is an important principle for ATC classification as it
allows aggregation of data in drug utilization monitoring and research without
counting a pharmaceutical product more than once. This principle is strictly
handled by the WHO Collaborating Centre so that users in different countries
shall be able to classify a pharmaceutical product (defined by active ingredient/s,
route of administration and strength) in the same way.
A pharmaceutical product may be approved for two or more equally important

indications, and the main therapeutic use may differ from one country to
another. This will often give several classification alternatives. Such drugs are
only given one code, the main indication being decided on the basis of the
available information. Problems are discussed in the WHO International Working
Group for Drug Statistics Methodology where the final classification is decided.
Cross-references will be given in the guidelines to indicate the various uses of

such drugs.
3. More than one ATC code for a medicinal substance
A medicinal substance can be given more than one ATC code if it is available in
two or more strengths or routes of administration with clearly different
therapeutic uses.
Example of different strengths:

- Finasteride is available in two different strengths. A low strength tablet for the
treatment of male pattern baldness is classified under D11AX - Other
dermatologicals. A high strength tablet used in the treatment of benign
prostatic hypertrophy (BPH) is classified under G04C - Drugs used in BPH.
17
Example of different administration forms:
- Prednisolone in single ingredient products is given several ATC codes due to
different therapeutic use and different formulations.
A07EA01 Intestinal antiinflammatory agents (mainly enemas and foams)

C05AA04 Antihemorrhoidals for topical use (suppositories)
D07AA03 Dermatological preparations (creams, ointments and lotions)
H02AB06 Corticosteroids for systemic use (tablets, injections)
R01AD02 Nasal decongestants (nasal sprays/drops)
S01BA04 Ophthalmologicals (eye drops)
S02BA03 Otologicals (ear drops)
4. New ATC groups and “other” groups (X groups)
A new medicinal substance not clearly belonging to any existing ATC 4th level will
as a main rule be placed in an X group ("other" group) in the relevant 3rd level.
To avoid a situation of several 4th levels with only one single substance in each,
new specific 4th levels are as a general rule only established when at least two
substances with marketing authorisations fit in the group. In addition, a new 4th
level should be regarded a benefit for drug utilization research. New and
innovative pharmaceutical products will therefore often be classified in an X
group and such groups could be established for only one single substance.
5. Other general principles
Immediate and slow release tablets will normally have the same ATC code.
Different stereoisomeric forms will normally have separate ATC codes.

Exceptions will be described in the guidelines for the respective ATC groups
Prodrugs are usually assigned separate ATC codes if the dosages used are
different and/or the nonproprietary name (INN) of the prodrug and the active
drugs are different.
Example:
J01CA08 pivmecillinam
J01CA11 mecillinam
Obsolete drugs or drugs withdrawn from the market are kept in the ATC system,
since exclusion of substances from the ATC system may create difficulties for the
users of the system when considering historical data.
18
D. Classification of combination products
Pharmaceutical products containing two or more active ingredients are regarded

as combinations (incl. combination packages) and given different ATC codes from
plain products containing one active ingredient. Stereoisomeric mixtures are
regarded as plain products. Medicinal products which in addition to one active
ingredient contain auxiliary substances intended to increase the stability of the
product (e.g. vaccines containing small amounts of antibacterials), increase the
duration (e.g. depot formulations) and/or increase the absorption (e.g. different
solvents in various dermatologicals) are considered as plain products.
The classification of combination products is a challenge in any classification

system. As for plain products, combinations are in general classified according to
their main therapeutic use or pharmacological class. A medicinal product
containing an analgesic and a tranquillizer, and used primarily to ease pain,
should be classified as an analgesic. Likewise, combinations of analgesics and
antispasmodics will be classified in A03 - Drugs for functional gastrointestinal
disorders if the antispasmodic effect of the product is considered the most
important. Similar examples are described in detail in the guidelines for the
relevant drug groups.
In some ATC groups a ranking is introduced to help in the classification of

combination products (e.g. combinations of different antihypertensives and
combinations of different analgesics). This ranking shows which drug takes
precedence over others when the classification is decided. This is detailed in the
guidelines for the relevant drug groups.
A commonly used principle for combinations with active ingredients not

belonging to the same ATC 4th level, is that the main ingredient in the
combination is identified and the combination is given a separate 5th level code
(50-series) in the same 4th level as the main ingredient is classified.
Example:
N02BE01 paracetamol
N02BE51 paracetamol, combinations excl. psycholeptics
In this example different combination products share the same main active
ingredient (paracetamol in the example above) and are given the same ATC code.
Combinations of e.g. paracetamol + acetylsalicylic acid and paracetamol +
caffeine are thus classified in the same code N02BE51 paracetamol, combinations
excl psycholeptics.
19
The names of all active ingredients of a combination are given in some ATC 5th
levels. This principle has been used more frequently in recent years in order to
give a better identification of the various combinations.
Example:
M01AE02 naproxen
M01AE52 naproxen and esomeprazole
M01AE56 naproxen and misoprostol
Some combination products containing psycholeptic drugs, which are not

classified under N05 - Psycholeptics or N06 - Psychoanaleptics, are classified at
separate 5th levels using the 70-series, e.g. N02BE71 paracetamol, combinations
with psycholeptics.
Most of the ATC 70-series codes were established many years ago, and the
products included in these codes may be obsolete today.
Combinations containing two or more active ingredients belonging to the same

4th level are in some cases classified using the 5th level code 30 (or 20). Further
explanation is given in the relevant chapters of the guidelines. Only a few new
codes have been established according to this principle in recent years.Further
explanation is given in the relevant chapters of the guidelines.
Example:
B01AC06 acetylsalicylic acid
B01AC07 dipyridamole
B01AC30 combinations (e.g. acetylsalicylic acid and dipyridamole)
An important principle used more frequently in recent years as more rational

combinations have been marketed, is to assign separate ATC 3rd or 4th levels for
combinations.
Examples:
C10B Lipid modifying agents, combinations
J05AR Antivirals for treatment of HIV infections, combinations
N02AJ Opioids in combination with non-opioid analgesics
R03AL Adrenergics in combination with anticholinergics incl triple combinations
with corticosteroids
In these ATC groups for combinations, the ATC 5th level code often specify the
active ingredients (e.g. C10BX04 simvastatin, acetylsalicylic acid and ramipril).
20
How specific and “visible” a combination appears in the ATC classification, will to
some extent depend on the need for a detailed classification from a drug
utilization point of view.
There are some exceptions to these main principles and these are explained in
the guidelines.
E. Principles for changing ATC codes
As the selection of drugs and their uses are continually changing and expanding,
regular revisions of the ATC system will always be necessary.
Changes in the ATC classification should be kept to a minimum. An important aim

is to keep a stable classification system over time with as few changes as possible
and still have a classification where new therapy and new pharmacological
principles find an appropriate place. Before alterations are made, any potential
difficulties for the use of the ATC system in drug utilization monitoring and
research are considered and related to the benefits that could be achieved by the
alteration.
Alterations in ATC classification can be made when the main use of a drug has
clearly changed, and when new groups are required to accommodate new
substances or to achieve better specificity in the groupings. Other reasons for
changes can be new knowledge about mechanism of action or the need for
splitting large and complex groups.
When it is decided to make an alteration, the following principles are used:
- When new therapeutic or pharmacological ATC groups are assigned, it should

always be considered if there are substances in other groups that should be
included in the new group.
- When changing ATC codes for plain products, it should always be considered if
it is necessary to change the ATC code for any combination products with the
same active ingredient.
- When an ATC code is changed for a substance, the previous code is not reused
for new substances.
When an ATC code is altered, the DDD is also reviewed. For example, when the
classification of chloroquine was changed from ATC group M to P (i.e. classified
only as an antimalarial), the DDD was changed since the dosages used for
21
treatment of malaria are different from the dosages used for rheumatic
disorders.
A cumulative overview of all ATC alterations back to 2005 is available on the

website of the WHO Centre.
F. The EphMRA classification system
The ATC classification system was originally based on the same main principles as
the Anatomical Classification developed by the European Pharmaceutical Market
Research Association (EphMRA) and the Pharmaceutical Business Intelligence and
Research Group (PBIRG). In this classification, drugs are classified in a hierarchy
of three and sometimes four levels mainly according to their indications and use.
Many of these quite similar to the ATC structure, but in many groups, less
detailed. There are no specific codes for the active ingredient (5th level in the
ATC). Contrary to the ATC classification, EphMRA classifies medicinal products. It
is possible to find products with the same active ingredient, route of
administration and strength in several classes. Despite a similar structure at the
higher levels, the ATC classification and the EphMRA classification have
developed individually for many years.
Since 1991 there has been an annual consultation between the EphMRA
classification committee and the WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics
Methodology to discuss classification problems and to harmonize when possible.
The purposes of the two systems differ as the primary objective of the EphMRA
classification is to satisfy the marketing needs of pharmaceutical companies. A
complete harmonization is therefore neither feasible nor an aim. An important
aim of the annual meeting is therefore to describe the differences (i.e. show the
differences by giving bridges) and similarities in groups where harmonization is
not achieved. The harmonization process was initiated in order to minimise the
confusion of having two very similar classification systems.
There are many differences between the EphMRA classification and the ATC
classification. This means that data prepared using the ATC classification cannot
be directly compared with data prepared using the EphMRA system. Awareness
of the differences between the two systems is then particularly important. In
some settings, and on the EphMRA website, the system is referred to as the ATC
classification and this has caused confusion among users over the years.
The EphMRA classification system is used worldwide by IQVIA (IMS

Health/Quintiles) in producing marketing research statistics for the
22
pharmaceutical industry. An annually updated comparison booklet of the two
systems is available.
III. DDD (DEFINED DAILY DOSE)
A. Definition and general considerations
The basic definition of the unit is:
The DDD is the assumed average maintenance dose per day for a drug used for its
main indication in adults.
The DDD is a unit of measurement and does not necessarily reflect the
recommended or Prescribed Daily Dose (see page 32). Therapeutic doses for
individual patients and patient groups will often differ from the DDD as they will
be based on individual characteristics (such as age, weight, ethnic differences,
type and severity of disease) and pharmacokinetic considerations.
Only one DDD is assigned per ATC code and route of administration (e.g. oral
formulation). The DDD is nearly always a compromise based on a review of
available information including doses used in various countries when this
information is available. The DDD is sometimes a “dose” that is rarely if ever
prescribed, because it might be an average of two or more commonly used doses.
Drug utilization data presented in DDDs only give a rough estimate of

consumption and not an exact picture of actual use. DDDs provide a fixed unit of
measurement independent of price, currencies, package size and strength
enabling the researcher to assess trends in drug consumption and to perform
comparisons between population groups.
DDDs are not established for topical products, sera, vaccines, antineoplastic
agents, allergen extracts, general and local anesthetics and contrast media.
B. Principles for DDD assignment
1. General principles
DDDs are only assigned to drugs with an ATC code and a DDD will normally not be
assigned for a substance before a product is approved and marketed in at least
one country.
23
The basic principle is to assign only one DDD per route of administration within an
ATC code.
DDDs for single substances are normally based on monotherapy. Exceptions to

this rule are given in the guidelines of the relevant ATC groups.
For substances indicated for rare disorders with highly individual dosing
schedules, the Working Group could decide not to assign a DDD.
DDDs for herbal medicinal products are not included in the ATC index. They are
published in an ATC sorted list on the website (www.whocc.no).
When a new DDD is assigned, various sources are used to get the best overview
of the actual or expected use of a substance. The assigned DDD is based on the
following principles:
- The average adult dose recommended for the main indication as reflected by
the ATC code. When the recommended dose refers to body weight, an adult is
considered to be a person of 70 kg. It should be emphasised that even special
pharmaceutical forms mainly intended for children (e.g. mixtures,
suppositories) are assigned the DDD used for adults. Exceptions are made for
some products only used by children, e.g. growth hormones and fluoride
tablets.
- The recommended maintenance dose (long term therapeutic dose) is usually

preferred when establishing the DDD. The initial dose may differ from the
maintenance dose but this is not reflected in the DDD. If the approved dose
recommendation provides limited information about the maintenance dose,
the DDD will usually be the average of the maintenance dose range. Examples
of interpretation of approved dose titration recommendations:
- “Titrate up to a high dose if it is tolerated”: the high dose would normally
be chosen as the DDD.
- “Consider to increase the dose only if efficacy is not satisfactory with
initial dose”: the DDD would normally be based on the initial dose.
- For some groups of medicinal products specific principles for DDD assignment
are established (e.g. the DDDs for the selective serotonin agonists in the
treatment of migraine are based on the approved initial dose). These
principles are given in the guidelines for the relevant ATC groups.
24
- The treatment dose is generally used. If, however, prophylaxis is the main
indication, this dose is used, e.g. for fluoride tablets (A01AA01) and some
antimalarials.
- A DDD is usually established according to the declared content (strength) of the

product. Various salts of a substance are usually not given different DDDs.
Exceptions are described in the guidelines for the relevant ATC groups. For
example, the DDDs for antimalarials are expressed as the base.
- Different stereoisomeric forms are normally assigned separate DDDs and ATC
codes. The DDDs for stereoisomeric forms are described in the respective ATC
groups.
- Prodrugs, which have not been given a separate ATC code, are normally not
given a separate DDD.
- The DDD is often identical for various dosage forms of the same drug.
Different DDDs can be established when the bioavailability is substantially
different for various routes of administration (e.g. oral and parenteral
administration of morphine) or if the dosage forms are used for different
indications. When the use of parenteral formulations represents only a minor
fraction of the total use for a specific indication, these products have normally
not received a separate DDD even if the bioavailability of the oral form is
substantially different. This principle has not been strictly followed in recent
years. Parenteral antibacterials are for example mainly used in hospitals and
often for more severe infections than in primary care. The DDDs are frequently
used as indicators for antibacterial use in hospitals, and it has been decided
that assigning different DDDs for oral and parenteral formulations could be
important in some cases to improve the usefulness of the methodology in drug
utilization monitoring and research.
- Parenteral products with different routes of administration (e.g. i.v. and i.m.)
have the same DDD.
2. Combination products
The DDDs assigned for combination products are based on the main principle of
counting the combination as one daily dose, regardless of the number of active
ingredients included in the combination. If a treatment schedule for a patient
includes e.g. two single ingredient products, then the consumption will be
measured by counting the DDDs of each single ingredient product separately. If,
25
however, a treatment schedule includes a combination product containing two
active ingredients, then the calculated consumption measured in DDDs will
normally be lower since the DDD for the combination will be counted.
Example I:
Treatment with two products, each containing one active ingredient:
Product A: Tablets containing 20 mg of substance X (DDD = 20 mg)
Product B: Tablets containing 25 mg of substance Y (DDD = 25 mg)
The dosing schedule 1 tablet of A plus 1 tablet of B daily will be calculated as a
consumption of 2 DDDs.
Example II:
Treatment with a combination product containing two active ingredients:
Product C: Tablets containing 20 mg of substance X and 12.5 mg of substance Y.
The DDD of the combination products is assigned as 1 UD = 1 tablet.
The dosing schedule 1 tablet of C daily will be calculated as 1 DDD (even though it
will be equivalent to 1.5 DDD of the single active ingredients).
The following principles for assigning DDDs to combination products apply:
1. For combination products (other than the combination products used in

hypertension, see point 2 below) where the ATC code identifies the main
ingredient (i.e. for the 50- and 70-series combinations and for some 4th level
combinations), the DDD for the combination product should be equal to the
DDD for the main active ingredient.
2. For combination products used for the treatment of hypertension (e.g. ATC
group C02, C03, C07, C08 and C09), DDDs are based on the average number of
dosing intervals per day. This means that: 1 tablet is the DDD for combinations
given once daily, whereas 2 tablets is the DDD for combinations given twice
daily and 3 tablets is the DDD for combinations given three times daily etc.
This principle means that the assigned DDDs may differ from the DDD assigned
for the single active ingredient (according to the ATC code).
For all combination products where the DDD assigned deviates from the
principles given above, a list of DDDs is available from the Centre (published on
the website www.whocc.no).
26
3. Other factors
a) Fixed doses
For some groups of products, e.g. cough mixtures in ATC group R05 and
multivitamins in ATC group A11, the composition of various products may differ,
but the average recommended dose is usually the same. Such DDDs are called
"fixed dose".
In some ATC groups, it has been decided to use fixed DDDs for all combination
products given in e.g. number of tablets regardless of strength. These rules are
clearly stated in the chapters for the respective ATC groups in this publication
(e.g. ATC group A02AD, A02BD and A02BX).
For eye drops used in glaucoma therapy (S01E), a fixed dose regardless of
strength has been established in the different subgroups. This is based on the
assumption that only one drop is applied in each eye per dose given, regardless of
strength.
When fixed doses are assigned, these will be further described in the guidelines
for the relevant ATC groups.
b) Depot formulations
Depot formulations (e.g. sustained release formulations) are usually assigned the
same DDDs as the ordinary dosage forms. The very few exceptions to this main
rule are described in the guidelines for the different ATC groups.
c) Intermittent dosing
In certain therapeutic groups, e.g. hormones, many of the products are
administered intermittently. In such cases, the dose administered is divided by
the number of days in the treatment period to obtain the average daily dose.
This means that medicament free periods in between courses are included in the
treatment period. This applies to e.g. depot antipsychotics (N05A) and
contraceptive pills (G03A), which are given intermittently.
d) Duration of treatment
The duration of treatment is normally not considered when assigning a DDD, even
if the drugs are used mainly in short periods. Exceptions from this main rule are
explained in the respective ATC groups.
27
4. Selection of units
For plain products, DDDs are as far as possible given in the amount of active
ingredients, using the following units: g (gram), mg (milligram), mcg (microgram),
ml (millilitre), mmol (millimole), U (unit), TU (thousand units) and MU (million
units). The abbreviation U for unit is used for international as well as other units.
For combination products or products where a DDD for various reasons cannot be
given in the amount of active ingredient, the unit UD (unit dose) is used:
- Tablets, suppositories, pessaries, etc:

1 UD equals 1 tablet, 1 suppository, 1 pessary etc.
- Powder for oral use:

1 UD equals 1 gram of powder. If the DDD for an oral powder is given in grams,
this refers to the content of active ingredient.
- Powder in single dose units for oral use:

1 UD equals 1 unit dose powder.
- Powder for injection:

1 UD equals 1 gram of powder. If the DDD for powder for injection is given in
grams, this refers to the content of active ingredient.
- Powder for inhalation:

1 UD equals 1 unit dose powder, e.g. 1 capsule.
- Liquid preparations for oral use (mixtures, syrups etc.):

1 UD equals 5 ml of the preparation.
- Liquid preparations for parenteral use (injections):

- Liquid preparations for rectal use:

- Liquid preparations for inhalation:

- Liquid preparations for inhalation in single dose units (unit dose):

1 UD equals 1 unit dose inhal.sol
28
- Enemas:
1 UD equals 1 enema.
- Plaster for transdermal application:

1 UD equals 1 plaster.
- Vaginal cream:
1 UD equals 1 dose, 1 application.
For combination packages consisting of two or more plain products, the UD

concept is used when assigning DDDs also for these combinations. 1 UD will still
refer to 1 unit dose in the package, and if a combination package contains, e.g. 4
tablets with different ingredients to be taken once daily, the DDD assigned will be
4 UD.
C. Pediatric DDD
DDDs are normally assigned based on use in adults (see page 23).
For medicinal products approved for use in children, the dose recommendations
will differ based on age and body weight. Many medicinal products used in
children are not even approved for such use, and documentation regarding dose
regimens is not available.
Thus the WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology has
concluded that pediatric DDDs are challenging to assign and problems related to
drug utilization research in children cannot be solved by such means.
Estimating the prevalence of drug use in children is not possible by using crude
sales data presented in DDDs. Prescribed daily dosages and indications in a
pediatric population should be used if available and compared with the DDD
values. If the pediatric subgroup is difficult to identify, the general DDD should be
used as a measuring tool for overall comparisons.
D. Principles for reviewing and changing DDD
DDDs sometimes need to be reviewed because dosages may change over time,
e.g. due to the introduction of new main indications or new research. The
International Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology may review a DDD
whenever the Group finds it appropriate.
29
A major aim of the Collaborating Centre and Working Group is to maintain stable
ATC codes and DDDs over time. This allows trends in drug utilization to be
studied without the complication of frequent changes. Changes in DDDs are to
be kept to a minimum and avoided as far as possible, as too many alterations are
disadvantageous for long-term studies on drug utilization. Before alterations are
made, difficulties arising for the users are weighed against the benefits achieved
by the alteration.
- The same principles used to assign new DDDs also apply when DDDs are
reviewed.
- Changes are generally not made unless they are at least in the order of 50%.
This rule is not used for the three year revision of DDDs, where smaller
alterations are allowed. Further, minor alterations are sometimes accepted for
important drugs, which are frequently used.
DDD review after three years

All newly assigned DDDs are reviewed during the third year after inclusion in the
ATC Index with DDDs. The DDDs are reviewed at the first semi-annual meeting of
the International Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology. The following
are considered:
- Recommended dosages as listed in drug catalogues in different countries

and/or published in peer reviewed scientific journals or major international
textbooks.
- Data on prescribed daily doses (PDDs) from a range of countries if available.

Figures showing the prescribed daily dose (PDD) can be useful when reviewing
an assigned DDD. Usually more data concerning PDDs are available after a
three years period than at the time of marketing.
- Established main indication and therapy profile of the preparation (i.e. has the
main indication changed?)
- Existing DDDs in the ATC group.
- Written input from users to the DDD.
When reviewing combination products, changes in the DDDs for the different
active ingredients are an important consideration.
30
Further reviews of DDDs
After the first three-year period, the DDD normally remains unchanged for at
least five years unless the WHO Working Group decides to make a total revision
of all DDDs assigned in an ATC group. Proposed DDD changes from users of the
system, based on new information will always be considered, but only after the
three years revision has been performed.
E. Description of other drug utilization metrics
Cost
Drug use can be expressed in terms of costs (e.g. national currency). Cost figures
are suitable for an overall cost analysis of drug expenditure. National and
international comparisons based on cost parameters are often misleading and of
limited value in the evaluation of drug use. Price differences between alternative
preparations and different national cost levels make the evaluation difficult.
Long-term studies are also difficult due to fluctuations in currency and changes in
prices.
When cost data are used, an increase in the use of cheaper drugs may have little
influence on the total level, while a shift to more expensive drugs is more readily
noticed.
Volume
Common physical units (e.g. grams, kilos, litres), numbers of packages or tablets
and numbers of prescriptions are also used for quantifying drug consumption.
These units can be applied only when the use of one drug or well defined
products is evaluated. Problems arise, however, when the consumption of whole
drug groups is considered.
If consumption is given in terms of grams of active ingredients, drugs with low

potency will have a larger fraction of the total than drugs with high potency.
Combined products may also contain different amounts of active ingredients
from plain products, which will not be reflected in the figures.
Counting the numbers of tablets also has disadvantages, because the strengths of
tablets vary, with the result that low strength preparations contribute relatively
more than high strength preparations. Also, short-acting preparations will often
contribute more than long-acting preparations.
31
The number of prescriptions does not give a good expression of total use unless
the total amounts of drugs per prescription are also considered. However,
counting prescriptions is of great value in measuring the frequency of
prescriptions and evaluating the clinical use of drugs (e.g. diagnosis and dosages
used).
Prescribed daily dose

The prescribed daily dose (PDD) is defined as the average dose prescribed
according to a representative sample of prescriptions. The PDD can be
determined from prescription studies, medical- or pharmacy records and patient
interviews. It is important to relate the PDD to the diagnosis on which the dosage
is based. The PDD will give the average daily amount of a drug that is actually
prescribed. When there is a substantial discrepancy between the PDD and the
defined daily dose (DDD), it is important to take this into consideration when
evaluating and interpreting drug consumption figures.
For drugs where the recommended dosage differs from one indication to another
(e.g. the antipsychotics) it is important that diagnosis is linked to the prescribed
daily dose given. Pharmacoepidemiological information (e.g. sex, age and
mono/combined therapy) is also important in order to interpret a PDD.
The PDD can vary according to both the illness treated and national therapy
traditions. For antiinfectives, for instance, PDDs vary according to the severity of
the infection. There can also be substantial differences between PDDs in various
countries. PDDs in Asian populations are often lower than in Caucasian
populations.
The fact that PDDs may differ from one country to another should always be
considered when making international comparisons.
IV. USES OF THE ATC/DDD METHODOLOGY
A Implementation and maintenance of the ATC/DDD methodology
When the decision to introduce and use the ATC/DDD methodology is taken, it is
essential to realize that its proper use inevitably includes an important and time-
consuming first step: Each pharmaceutical product has to be linked to the
appropriate ATC code and DDD. For monitoring and comparing drug use
internationally it is important to ensure that the data retrieved are comparable,
in other words that the ATC groups from different countries, regions or health
facilities do have the expected content. In order to achieve this, it is of vital
32
importance that the officially correct ATC code is assigned to each pharmaceutical
product package. If possible, this work should be done on a national basis to
secure consistent use of the methodology within a country. Many countries have
established systems of unique identifiers for pharmaceutical products at the
package level. The number of DDDs per package should be calculated for each
product package and this information should be added to the pharmaceutical
products registry. The national medicines list and ATC/DDDs should be linked at
the level of the unique product identifier.
It is recommended to have a common structure for these pharmaceutical product
registries. National registries should as a minimum include the following
variables:
• Unique identifier (registration number)
• Medicinal product name (brand name/trademark)
• Pharmaceutical form
• Strength
• Pack size
• ATC code
• Active ingredient(s)
• DDD
• Route of administration
• Number of DDDs in the pack
Good procedures for updating national or other registries with new ATC
codes/DDDs and alterations should be established. It is recommended that the
responsibility for quality assurance and validation of national registries is
allocated to a national body in each country. This work should be performed by
competent persons with good knowledge of the ATC/DDD methodology.
An updated version of the ATC/DDD Index is issued in January each year. To be

able to compare drug utilization data from different countries and time periods, it
is essential to know which ATC codes and DDDs are used. A minimum number of
changes in the ATC codes and DDDs are made annually. Thus, it is important to
give proper references to the ATC/DDD version used when presenting drug
consumption figures.
B. Drug utilization
The main purpose of the ATC/DDD system is as a tool for presenting drug
utilization statistics with the aim of improving drug use. This is the purpose for
which the system was developed and it is with this purpose in mind that all
33
decisions about ATC/DDD classification are made. Consequently, using the
system for other purposes can be inappropriate.
Use of the ATC/DDD system allows the standardisation of drug groups and
represents a stable drug utilization metric to enable comparisons of drug use
between countries, regions, and other healthcare settings, and to examine trends
in drug use over time and in different settings.
Collecting and publishing drug utilization statistics are critical elements in the
process of improving the prescribing and dispensing of medicines. For drug
utilization statistics to have the best possible impact on drug use, the statistics
need to be used in a focused and active manner.
Examples of ways in which drug utilization statistics based on ATC and DDDs have
been and can be used to improve drug use include the following:
- National publications, which provide clinicians, pharmacists and others with a

profile of drug consumption in the country (with or without comparisons
between countries or between areas within the country).
- Publications providing feedback within health services to individual health

facilities, groups of health care providers, or individual health providers.
- Use of drug utilization statistics by national health systems, universities, drug

information centres, and others to identify possible over use, underuse or
misuse of individual drugs or therapeutic groups. Depending on the situation,
this information can then be used to initiate specific studies or specific
educational interventions. Educational interventions may include articles in
drug bulletins, articles in scientific journals, letters to clinicians, etc.
1. Data sources
The ATC/DDD system can be used for the collection of drug utilization statistics in
a variety of settings and from a variety of sources:
Examples are:
- Sales data such as wholesale data at a national, regional or local level.
- Dispensing data either comprehensive or sampled. Computerised pharmacies

can easily collect data on drugs dispensed. Alternatively, sample data can be
collected manually. Reimbursement systems, which operate in a number of
34
countries at the national level provide comprehensive dispensing data down to
the individual prescription level, as all prescriptions are submitted and recorded
for reimbursement. This is generally called “claims” data. Similar data are
often available through health insurance or health maintenance organisations.
- These databases can sometimes allow collection of demographic information

on the patients, and information on dose, duration of treatment and co-
prescribing. Linkage to hospital and medical databases can provide
information on indications, and outcomes such as hospitalisation, use of
specific medical services, and adverse drug reactions.
- Patient encounter based data. This is usually collected by specially designed

sampling studies such as those carried out by market research organisations.
However, increasing use of information technology at the medical practice level
are making such data more available. These methods have the advantage of
potentially providing accurate information on Prescribed Daily Doses, patient
demographics, duration of therapy, co-prescribing, indications, morbidity and
co-morbidity, and sometimes outcomes.
- Patient survey data. Collection of data at the patient level can provide
information about actual drug consumption and takes into account compliance
in filling prescriptions and taking medications as prescribed. It can also provide
qualitative information about perceptions, beliefs, and attitudes to the use of
medicines.
- Health Facility data. Data on medication use at all the above levels is often
available in health care settings such as hospitals and health centres at regional,
district, or village level.
2. DDD indicators and interpretations
Drug utilization figures expressed in DDDs are generally reported in units that
control for population size differences. This provides a measure of exposure or
therapeutic intensity in a defined population, allowing comparisons across
various time periods and population groups.
Drug Utilization figures should ideally be presented using a relevant denominator

for the health context such as numbers of DDDs per 1000 inhabitants per day,
DDD per inhabitant per year, or as DDDs per 100 bed days.
35
• DDD per 1000 inhabitants per day: Sales or prescription data presented in
DDDs per 1000 inhabitants per day may provide a rough estimate of the
proportion of the study population treated daily with a particular drug or
group of drugs. The figure 10 DDDs per 1000 inhabitants per day can be
interpreted as follows: in a representative group of 1000 inhabitants, 10
DDDs of the drug are utilized on average, on any given day of the year
analysed. Alternatively this can be expressed as 10/1000 (1%) of the
population are receiving this drug each day in that year. This estimate is
most useful for drugs used chronically and when there is good agreement
between the average prescribed daily dose (PDD) and the DDD.
• DDD per 100 bed days: The DDDs per 100 bed days may be applied when
drug use by inpatients is considered. The definition of a bed day may differ
between hospitals or countries. A common definition is: A bed day is a day
during which a person is confined to a bed and in which the patient stays
overnight in a hospital. Day cases (patients admitted for a medical
procedure or surgery in the morning and released before the evening) are
sometimes included as one bed day and sometimes excluded. The same
definition of bed days should always be chosen when performing
comparative studies. The figure 70 DDDs per 100 bed days of hypnotics
provides an estimate of the therapeutic intensity and estimates that 70% of
the inpatients receive one DDD of a hypnotic every day. This measure is
applied in analyses of in-hospital drug use. This indicator is quite useful for
benchmarking in and between hospitals.
• DDD/patient: This indicator is often calculated in pharmacoepidemiological

databases and expresses the treatment intensity/total exposure according
to a defined study period. If the actual dose used is equivalent to the DDD,
the DDD/patient would also express number of treatment days in a specific
period.
• DDDs per inhabitant per year: This indicator is often considered useful to
present the figures for antiinfectives (or other drugs normally used in short
periods). It will give an estimate of the number of days for which each
inhabitant is, on average, treated annually. For example, 5
DDDs/inhabitant/year indicates that the consumption is equivalent to
treatment of every inhabitant with a 5 days course during a certain year.
Alternatively, if the standard treatment period is known, the total number
of DDDs can be calculated as the number of treatment courses, and the
number of treatment courses can then be related to the total population.
36
Drug utilization data presented in DDDs give a rough estimate of consumption
and not an exact picture of the actual drug use, and the estimates described
above are only true if there is good agreement between the actually prescribed
dose and the DDD.
For some drug groups where DDDs have not been established, alternative ways of
presenting data are recommended. For example, consumption of antineoplastic
agents in ATC group L01 can be presented in grams of the active ingredient.
When there is a known discrepancy between the prescribed daily dose (PDD) and
the DDD, it is important to take this into account when interpreting drug
consumption figures. Caution should also be taken in situations where the
recommended dosage differs from one indication to another (e.g. antipsychotics),
in severe versus mild disease (e.g. antibiotics) and where PDDs may differ from
one population to another (e.g., according to sex, age, ethnicity or geographic
location).
Since alterations of ATC and DDDs do occur it is important to be aware of which

version of the ATC index is used in drug consumption studies especially when
comparing the data over time and when making international comparisons.
When presenting trends in drug consumption over time, the data for the whole
period (e.g. all years) should always be updated (recalculated) by using the most
recent version of the ATC index.
C. Drug Safety Assessment
The WHO Programme for International Drug Monitoring (PIDM): The WHO PIDM
aims to enhance patient care and patient safety in relation to the use of
medicines; and support public health programmes by providing reliable and
balanced information for the effective assessment of the risk-benefit profile of
medicines.
One of the main aims of the WHO PIDM is to identify the earliest possible adverse
drug reaction signals. The programme has more than 120 countries contributing
to the WHO global database of Individual Case Safety Reports (ICSRs) called
VigiBase®. VigiBase® is maintained and developed on behalf of the WHO by the
WHO Collaborating Centre for International Drug Monitoring (Uppsala Monitoring
Centre). VigiBase® uses the WHO Drug Dictionary which consists of the ATC
classification and is useful for drug safety assessment. Please note that many
37
unofficial ATC codes are used in the WHO Dictionary, but these are clearly
marked. The ATC classification allows aggregation of statistics and analysis in
reporting of adverse drug reactions.
In pharmacovigilance analyses using VigiBase® or other databases,

disproportionality analysis is an acknowledged tool to support signal detection.
Disproportionality metrics, e.g. the proportional reporting ratio (PRR), can be
calculated based on the ATC classification. When PRR is applied at the level of
ATC codes, the reporting rate of one specific event is calculated for a given ATC
code and compared to the reporting rate of the event in all ICSRs of the database
except those that contain one or more drugs from the ATC code of interest.
D. Drug information
ATC codes are included in pharmaceutical product information (e.g. Summary of

Product Characteristics) approved by EMA, the regulatory medicinal agency in the
EU.
ATC codes are included in some international drug textbooks (e.g. the Martindale)
and several national drug catalogues. ATC codes are also included in the WHO
Essential Drug List.
E. Drug costs, pricing, reimbursement and cost-containment
Basing detailed reimbursement, therapeutic group reference pricing and other

specific pricing decisions on the ATC and DDD assignments is a misuse of the
system. This is because the ATC and DDD assignments are designed solely to
maintain a stable system of drug consumption measurement, which can be used
to follow and compare trends in the utilization of drugs within and across
therapeutic groups. None the less, drug utilization data have a central role in the
quality of care cycle and ATC and DDD methodologies can be helpful in following
and comparing trends in cost, but need to be used with caution.
The DDD is a technical drug use metric. DDDs do not necessarily reflect
therapeutically equivalent doses of different drugs and therefore cannot be
assumed to represent daily doses that produce similar treatment outcomes for all
products within an ATC category. Such estimates of therapeutic equivalence are
very difficult to establish, particularly to the precision usually required for pricing
decisions. DDDs, if used with caution can be used to compare, for example, the
costs of two formulations of the same drug. However, it is usually not valid to use
38
this metric to compare the costs of different drugs or drug groups. The
relationships between therapeutically equivalent doses, the actual prescribed
daily dose (PDD) and DDD usually differ between drugs and, for the same drug,
between countries.
Moreover, even though PDDs commonly change over time altering a DDD
complicates drug utilization research, hence there is a reluctance to alter a DDD.
Alterations are not made unless there is evidence that changes in PDD are large,
or there is some particular reason such as a change in the main indication. For
these reasons, DDDs are not suitable for comparing drugs for specific, detailed
pricing, reimbursement and cost-containment decisions.
Similarly, basing reimbursement and pricing comparisons on the inclusion of

drugs in ATC groups is not recommended. The main indications for drugs (on
which ATC assignments are based) often differ widely between countries and, like
the PDD, can change over time. However, the ATC classifications can be useful
when costs need to be aggregated into drug groups or therapeutic areas to
determine, for example, to what extent increased costs can be attributed to
increased use of a therapeutic group over time.
Increasingly, however, national authorities are using the system for drug pricing,
reimbursement and cost containment decisions. This is a scientifically unjustified
and inappropriate use of the system for which the national authority must take
full responsibility. As a consequence, when disputes arise, the concerned parties
involved need to approach the national regulatory authority rather than those
responsible for the maintenance ofthe ATC/DDD classification system on an
international level.
F. Pharmaceutical marketing purposes
It is important to emphasise that the ATC classification does not necessarily

reflect the recommended therapeutic use in all respects. Therefore, the ATC
system should not be used as a tool for promoting medicines concerning efficacy,
mechanism of action or therapeutic profile in relation to other drugs.
It should be emphasised that assignment to different ATC groups does not mean
a difference in therapeutic effectiveness and assignment to the same ATC group
does not indicate therapeutic equivalence.
39
Concerning the use of price comparisons for marketing purposes, see point E
above.
V. PROCEDURES AND DATA REQUIREMENTS FOR ATC/DDD

ASSIGNMENT AND ALTERATIONS
A. Requests for ATC classification
1. Procedures and timing
All new entries in the ATC classification system are assigned on request from the
users. Requests for ATC classification of a medicinal substance should be
addressed to the WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology. The
application form for assignment of new ATC codes and DDDs is available on our
website www.whocc.no. Electronic applications are preferred. Application for
ATC/DDD is free of charge. The official language of the Centre is English.
Requests and documentation should accordingly be submitted in English.
If a substance marketed in a country is not included in the latest version of the

annually updated ATC classification index, a request for an ATC code may in
principle be sent from any user of the system (e.g. health authorities,
manufacturers, researchers and other users). It will usually be the manufacturer
who has best access to the information required for an application. The
manufacturer will usually wish to know about and be involved in an application
for an ATC classification and/or DDD assignment for one of their products,
particularly if it is a new drug.
A new chemical entity is normally not included in the ATC system before an
application for marketing authorisation is ready for submission in at least one
country. In some cases, it may be necessary to await a classification until the new
medicinal product has been approved in at least one country (especially for
chemical entities where it is considered difficult to establish a new 5th level).
These conditions are set to avoid including in the ATC system too many chemical
entities which never reach the market.
It is left to the national users of the ATC system to classify combination products
based on the principles given in these guidelines. The guidelines are prepared in
order to facilitate this work and to ensure that different users of the ATC system
classify in a consistent way. If the content of these guidelines is not sufficient to
decide a classification of a specific combination, or if it is necessary to establish a
40
new ATC entry, such problems should be addressed to the WHO Centre in Oslo.
The Centre also provides regular training courses to assist those working with the
system at a national level.
The WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology formally
approves all new ATC codes. The group has two annual meetings, normally in
March and October.
The steps in the approval procedure for new ATC codes are normally as follows:
- A standard letter confirming receipt of the request is returned from the Centre
to the applicant.
- If the new code is easy to assign, a preliminary ATC code assigned by the
Centre is returned to the applicant within 6-8 weeks, informing them that the
ATC code still has to be formally approved by the Working Group at the next
meeting.
- For substances with more than one alternative classification and for substances
which are difficult to classify into existing classifications, the requests are
discussed in the Working Group before assignment of a temporary ATC code.
The applicant receives this information within 6-8 weeks after receipt of the
request. After approval of the minutes of the Working Group meetings, the
decision of the temporary ATC code is sent from the Centre to the applicant.
- After approval of the minutes of the Working Group meeting the new ATC
codes approved at the meeting are published on the website www.whocc.no
and in the next issue of the publication WHO Drug Information. A deadline will
then be allowed for interested parties to comment or object to the decisions.
- If objections, justified on evidence submitted, are received, the ATC

classification will be discussed again at the following meeting of the Working
Group. If the decision is kept, then the decision is considered final after this
meeting. If a new decision is taken by the Working Group, notification of this
new ATC is published at our website www.whocc.no and in the next issue of
the publication WHO Drug Information. A deadline is then allowed for any
interested parties to comment or object to the decision.
- If no objections are received, the new ATC code is considered final and
included in the next issue of the ATC classification index. A new code can be
used when it is considered final. A list of new final ATC codes is also published
41
semi-annually on the website www.whocc.no and in the WHO Drug
Information.
In order to include requests for new ATC codes on the agenda for the Working
Group meetings, they should normally be forwarded to the Centre before 15
January (March meeting) and before 15 August (October meeting).
ATC codes approved at the March meeting (e.g. March 2023) will be included in
the ATC index the following year (i.e. January 2024). ATC codes approved at the
October meeting of the Working Group (e.g. October 2023) will appear in the ATC
index the year after the following year (i.e. January 2025).
2. Data requirements for submission
The following data should be submitted when requesting an ATC code for a
substance:
- Chemical structure and relationship to similar drugs
- Pharmacology and mechanism of action and relationships to similar drugs
- Main indication as shown in the product information in major countries where

it is licensed or submitted for licensing
- Other indications which are licensed or for which licensing is proposed in the
future
- Proposed ATC classification with justification based on the evidence submitted
- Status concerning marketing authorisation
- Information about therapeutic use, if available
Useful sources of these data would be approved product information documents

from regulatory authorities or proposed product information documents stating
that these are not yet approved. Summaries of submissions to, or evaluations
from, major regulatory agencies relating to the above are useful, as well as
market research data showing the percentage use for the main indications
42
B. Requests for ATC changes
Any user may in principle propose changes to ATC classifications. There is no

application form for ATC alterations. Proposals for changes should be sent to the
WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology, and all proposals will
be discussed in the WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics
Methodology.
The steps in the evaluation procedure for changes to ATC classifications are as
follows:
- The Centre will confirm receipt of the proposal for a change and give
information about the time schedule for discussion at the Working Group
meeting.
- After approval of the minutes of the Working Group meeting, the decision from
the meeting concerning the proposed change is distributed from the Centre to
those requesting the change (the applicant). Independent of whether it has
been decided to change or not, a deadline will be allowed for the applicant to
comment or object to this decision.
- If it is decided to make a change, notification of this change is published at our

website www.whocc.no and in the next issue of the WHO Drug Information. A
deadline is then allowed for interested parties to comment or object to the
change.
- If objections, justified by submitted evidence, are received, the ATC alteration

will be discussed again at the following meeting of the Working Group, and a
final decision will then be taken.
- If no objections are received, the altered ATC classification will be implemented

in the next issue of the ATC classification index.
In order to include proposals for ATC alterations on the agenda for the Working
Group meetings, they should be forwarded to the Centre before 15 January
(March meeting) and before 15 August (October meeting).
ATC alterations decided at the March meeting (e.g. March 2023 be included in
the ATC index the following year (i.e. January 2024). ATC alterations decided at
43
the October meeting of the Working Group (e.g. October 2023) will be included in
the ATC index the year after the following year (i.e. January 2025).
When requesting changes to ATC classifications, the data requirements are

similar to the data required for new ATC codes. An important basis for the
ATC/DDD system is to maintain a stable system for drug consumption studies.
For this reason, there need to be compelling reasons for changing ATC codes. It is
therefore important to submit data, which justify the proposed change.
If a change in the main therapeutic use is the reason for the proposed change, the
data submitted should clearly indicate this change (e.g. market research data
showing the percentage use for the different indications in a range of countries).
If new knowledge of pharmacology or mechanism of action is the reason for the

proposed change, relevant evidence should be submitted.
If the proposed change is to establish specific ATC groups for one or more
substances already classified in another group (usually a various group), it is
necessary to submit data that verify that the change is beneficial and represents
an improvement of the ATC classification for presenting drug consumption
statistics. Justifications based on the use of the system in reimbursement, for
pricing or marketing reasons will not be considered.
C. Requests for DDD assignment
New DDDs are assigned on request from the users. Requests for new DDDs
should be addressed to the WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics
Methodology. The application form for assignment of new ATC codes and DDDs
is available on our website (www.whocc.no). Electronic applications are
preferred and applications are free of charge. Any user may in principle propose a
new DDD (e.g. health authorities, manufacturers, researchers and others).
However, as with ATC code assignment, it is the manufacturer who will usually
have the best access to the required information for new drugs.
A DDD will only be assigned for substances which have received an ATC code, or
where the ATC code can be assigned in connection with the DDD. DDDs are not
assigned before marketing is approved in at least one country.
44
All new DDDs are discussed and approved by the WHO International Working
Group for Drug Statistics Methodology.
The steps in the approval procedure for new DDDs are very similar to the
procedure for new ATC codes (see page 40):
- The Centre will confirm receipt of the request for a new DDD and give
information to those requesting the DDD (the applicant) about the time
schedule for discussion at the following Working Group meeting.
- After approval of the minutes of the Working Group meeting, the decision from
the meeting concerning the DDD is distributed from the Centre to the
applicant.
- The new DDDs are published on the website www.whocc.no and in the next
issue of the WHO publication: WHO Drug Information. A deadline is then
allowed for interested parties to comment or object to the new DDD.
- If objections, justified on submitted evidence, are received, the DDD will be

discussed again at the following meeting of the Working Group. If the decision
is kept, then the decision is considered final after this meeting. If a new
decision is taken by the Working Group, notification of this new DDD is
published at our website www.whocc.no and in the next issue of the
publication WHO Drug Information. A deadline is then allowed for any
interested part to comment or object to the decision.
- If no objections are received, the new DDD is considered final after the
deadline, and included in the next issue of the ATC classification index. A list of
final DDDs is also published semi-annually at our website www.whocc.no and in
the WHO Drug Information.
In order to include requests for new DDDs on the agenda for the Working Group
meetings, they should be forwarded to the Centre before 15 January (March
meeting) and before 15 August (October meeting).
New DDDs decided at the March meeting (e.g. March 2023) will be included in
the ATC index the following year (i.e. January 2024). New DDDs decided at the
October meeting of the Working Group (e.g. October 2023 will be included in the
ATC index the year after the following year (i.e. January 2025).
45
The following information is required when requesting a new DDD:
- Dose ranges and dosing instructions for each indication in the product
information approved by one or more major regulatory authorities.
- Proposal for a DDD justified by the submitted information.
- Status concerning marketing authorisation.
- Doses used in clinical trials to support marketing if available.
- Market research data on doses used in practice in various countries if such data
are available.
- Where the drug is to fit into an existing ATC classification, comparative dosing
information should be provided if available. It is difficult to define
therapeutically equivalent doses with the degree of precision often asked for,
and the DDDs within therapeutic groups do not necessarily represent
therapeutically equivalent doses.
D. Requests for DDD changes
Any user may in principle propose changes in DDDs. There is no application form
for DDD changes. Proposal for changes should be sent to the WHO Collaborating
Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology. All proposals will be discussed by the
WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology.
The steps in the evaluation procedure for changes to DDDs are the same as the
procedures for changes to ATC classifications (see page 43).
When requesting changes of DDDs, the data requirements are similar to the data
required for new DDDs. An important basis for the ATC/DDD system is to
maintain a stable system for drug consumption studies. Because of this, there
need to be compelling reasons to change DDDs. Arguments for DDD changes
might be:
46
- a change in the main indication so that the dose recommendation has been
altered.
- a large change (in the order of 50%) in the average dose used (see also page
30). This would need to be supported by market research data in a range of
countries. However, for the three year revision a smaller change can be
accepted (see page 30).
Minor changes in DDD for use in reimbursement, for pricing or marketing

purposes will not be considered.
VI. DESCRIPTION OF ATC INDEX WITH DDDs
The WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology publishes an

updated version of the complete ATC index with DDDs annually. The ATC index is
available in paper copy and includes one list sorted according to ATC codes, with
all the established ATC codes and DDDs for plain substances, and one list
alphabetically sorted according to nonproprietary drug names, including all ATC
5th levels. The ATC index is also available in electronic format (Excel or XML).
Order form is available on the website www.whocc.no.
The DDDs which are to be reviewed during the year, are listed in Annex I in the
ATC index.
A searchable version of the index is available on the website www.whocc.no. The

search options enable the user to find ATC codes and DDDs based on substance
name or ATC levels. Text from the Guidelines for ATC classification and DDD
assignment linked to the ATC level is also available. The text will give information
related to the background for the ATC and DDD assignment.
A pdf document of the Guidelines is available on our website.
Lists of the annual ATC/DDD alterations and new ATC/DDDs are available in
December each year on our website www.whocc.no. The lists are distributed
free of charge by email to the users of the ATC/DDD system included on the
Centre’s mailing list.
Cumulative lists of ATC/DDD alterations performed since 2005 are available on

our website www.whocc.no.
47
List of DDDs for combined products where the assigned DDD deviates from the
general principles is available on our website www.whocc.no.
VII. OTHER ATC CLASSIFICATION SYSTEMS
A. ATCvet classification
The Anatomical Therapeutic Chemical classification for veterinary medicinal

products, ATCvet, is based on the same main principles as the ATC system for
medicines for human use. The ATCvet classification is kept as close to the human
system as possible, but with special adaptations in order to make it suitable for
veterinary medicines. The ATCvet classification was developed by the Nordic
Council on Medicines, and was taken over by the WHO Collaborating Centre for
Drug Statistics Methodology in January 2001. Further information on the ATCvet
classification can be found on our website www.whocc.no.
B. ATC herbal classification
The Herbal ATC (HATC) system provides a framework for the nomenclature and
therapeutic classification of herbal substances and their combinations. The
classification is structurally similar to the official ATC system. Herbal remedies in
the Herbal ATC system are divided into groups according to their therapeutic use,
and additional categories are introduced to the HATC for herbal-specific groups.
The herbal classification is not adopted by WHO. The Uppsala Monitoring Centre
is responsible for the ATC herbal classification, and it is used in their WHO Drug
Global Dictionary to facilitate capture, grouping and aggregation of herbal
remedies data at different levels of specificity.
Further information about the Herbal ATC classification can be obtained from the
Uppsala Monitoring Centre (WHO Collaborating Centre for International Drug
Monitoring), http://www.who-umc.org/.
48
VIII. ATC/DDD INTERPRETATIVE GUIDELINES
This book includes all ATC headings down to the 4th level.
The comments included vary from one ATC group to another. No comments are
given if the establishment of ATC codes and DDDs is considered to cause no
special problems.
Comments related to the assignment of DDDs are given in shadowed boxes.
The interpretative guidelines that follow should be consulted whenever the

ATC/DDD system is used for drug utilization research. They describe particular
issues that were discussed and resolved by consensus of the Working Group while
establishing ATC/DDDs. If no special problems or issues arose during that
process, no comments are given.
49
ATC SYSTEM MAIN GROUPS
The main groups of the ATC classification system are listed below. A survey of
each main group is given in the beginning of each of the following chapters.
A Alimentary tract and metabolism
B Blood and blood forming organs
C Cardiovascular system
D Dermatologicals
G Genito urinary system and sex hormones
H Systemic hormonal preparations, excl. sex hormones and insulins
J Antiinfectives for systemic use
L Antineoplastic and immunomodulating agents
M Musculo-skeletal system
N Nervous system
P Antiparasitic products, insecticides and repellents
R Respiratory system
S Sensory organs
V Various
50
A ALIMENTARY TRACT AND METABOLISM
A01 STOMATOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS

A Stomatological preparations
A02 DRUGS FOR ACID RELATED DISORDERS

A Antacids
B Drugs for peptic ulcer and gastro-oesophageal reflux disease (GORD)
X Other drugs for acid related disorders
A03 DRUGS FOR FUNCTIONAL GASTROINTESTINAL DISORDERS

A Drugs for functional gastrointestinal disorders
B Belladonna and derivatives, plain
C Antispasmodics in combination with psycholeptics
D Antispasmodics in combination with analgesics
E Antispasmodics and anticholinergics in combination with other drugs
F Propulsives
A04 ANTIEMETICS AND ANTINAUSEANTS

A Antiemetics and antinauseants
A05 BILE AND LIVER THERAPY

A Bile therapy
B Liver therapy, lipotropics
C Drugs for bile therapy and lipotropics in combination
A06 DRUGS FOR CONSTIPATION

A Drugs for constipation
A07 ANTIDIARRHEALS, INTESTINAL ANTIINFLAMMATORY/ ANTIINFECTIVE

AGENTS
A Intestinal antiinfectives
B Intestinal adsorbents
C Electrolytes with carbohydrates
D Antipropulsives
E Intestinal antiinflammatory agents
F Antidiarrheal microorganisms
X Other antidiarrheals
51
A08 ANTIOBESITY PREPARATIONS, EXCL. DIET PRODUCTS
A Antiobesity preparations, excl. diet products
A09 DIGESTIVES, INCL. ENZYMES

A Digestives, incl. enzymes
A10 DRUGS USED IN DIABETES

A Insulins and analogues
B Blood glucose lowering drugs, excl. insulins
X Other drugs used in diabetes
A11 VITAMINS
A Multivitamins, combinations
B Multivitamins, plain
C Vitamin A and D, incl. combinations of the two
D Vitamin B1, plain and in combination with vitamin B6 and B12
E Vitamin B-complex, incl. combinations
G Ascorbic acid (vitamin C), incl. combinations
H Other plain vitamin preparations
J Other vitamin products, combinations
A12 MINERAL SUPPLEMENTS

A Calcium
B Potassium
C Other mineral supplements
A13 TONICS
A Tonics
A14 ANABOLIC AGENTS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

A Anabolic steroids
B Other anabolic agents
A15 APPETITE STIMULANTS
A16 OTHER ALIMENTARY TRACT AND METABOLISM PRODUCTS

A Other alimentary tract and metabolism products
52
A ALIMENTARY TRACT AND METABOLISM
A01 STOMATOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS
A01A STOMATOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS
This group comprises agents for treatment of conditions of mouth and

teeth. Preparations mainly used in gingivitis, stomatitis etc. should be
classified in this group.
Preparations for the treatment of throat infections, (lozenges for common
cold conditions) or treatment of symptoms both in mouth and throat are
classified in R02 - Throat preparations.
Preparations containing local anesthetics, see N01B - Anesthetics, local,
and R02AD - Anesthetics, local.
A01AA Caries prophylactic agents
This group comprises all types of fluoride preparations (tablets, gargles,
toothpastes, chewing-gum etc.).
Combinations of olaflur and dectaflur are classified at the 5th level of
olaflur - A01AA03. Combinations of sodium fluoride and sodium
monofluorophosphate are classified in A01AA30.
Combinations of colecalciferol and sodium fluoride indicated for
prophylaxis of rickets and caries are classified in A11CC.
For caries prophylactic agents in A01AA, the DDDs are based on use in
children. DDDs are only established for tablets.
A01AB Antiinfectives and antiseptics for local oral treatment

This group comprises all antiinfective and antiseptic agents for the
treatment of stomatitis, gingivitis etc. Products used in common minor
infections of mouth and throat are classified in R02, e.g. cetylpyridinium.
Combinations of tetracycline with anti-inflammatory agents are classified at
the same 5th level as plain tetracycline (A01AB13).
Other antibiotics for local use, see D - Dermatologicals.
The DDD for amphotericin in this group refers to lozenges.
The DDD for minocycline is based on the amount of active substance
used in one periodontal pocket in local treatment of periodontitis.
53
A01AC Corticosteroids for local oral treatment
This group comprises corticosteroid preparations for the treatment of
gingivitis, stomatitis etc., i.e. corticosteroid preparations for use in the oral
cavity.
Combinations of corticosteroids and local anesthetics are classified here.
Other corticosteroids for local use, see D - Dermatologicals.
No DDDs have been established in this group. The dosage forms are
mainly ointments and pastes.
A01AD Other agents for local oral treatment

This group comprises e.g. various gargles and hemostatic agents used in
dentistry.
Becaplermin in a kit for implantation indicated to treat periodontally
related defects is classified here.
Other hemostatic agents, see B02BC - Local hemostatics.
E.g. combinations with local anesthetics for oral treatment are classified at
the various level A01AD11.
See also N01B - Anesthetics, local.
A02 DRUGS FOR ACID RELATED DISORDERS

A02A ANTACIDS
This group comprises plain antacid drugs, antacids in combination with
antiflatulents and antacids in combination with other drugs.
Antacids in combination with liquorice root or linseed are classified in this
group.
Plain antiflatulents, see A03AX - Other drugs for functional gastrointestinal
disorders.
The DDDs for antacids are based on treatment of hyperacidity and
dyspepsia, not ulcus. One exception, however, is antacids in
combination with antispasmodics in A02AG, where the DDDs are based
on treatment of ulcus.
For ordinary salt combinations in A02AD, fixed doses are used instead
of individual doses for every single preparation (10 tablets = 10 UD; 50
ml mixture = 10 UD).
54
A02AA Magnesium compounds
Magnesium carbonate used for treatment of mineral deficiency is
classified here.
Combinations of different magnesium compounds are classified in
A02AA10 - combinations.
A02AB Aluminium compounds
Combinations of different aluminium compounds are classified in
A02AB10 - combinations.
A02AC Calcium compounds
Combinations of different calcium compounds are classified in
A02AC10 - combinations.
A02AD Combinations and complexes of aluminium, calcium and magnesium
compounds
Antacids with two or more of the substances in combination are classified
here.
Ordinary salt combinations are classified at the same 5th level A02AD01
e.g. combinations of aluminium hydroxide, magnesium carbonate gel and
attapulgite, while the various complexes with a layer structure are
classified at separate 5th levels e.g. magaldrate and almagate.
A02AF Antacids with antiflatulents
A02AG Antacids with antispasmodics
Preparations containing a combination of antacids and antispasmodics are
classified in this group if the main use is as an antacid. See also A03 -
Drugs for functional gastrointestinal disorders.
A02AH Antacids with sodium bicarbonate
No ATC 5th levels are assigned in this group.
All oral formulations containing sodium bicarbonate including products
indicated for metabolic acidosis are classified in this group.
Parenteral formulations, see B05BB.
Preparations containing sodium bicarbonate to be used only in connection
with double-contrast radiography are classified in V07AY.
A02AX Antacids, other combinations
55
A02B DRUGS FOR PEPTIC ULCER AND GASTRO-OESOPHAGEAL REFLUX DISEASE
(GORD)
Peptic ulcer includes ulcers in the oesophagus, stomach or duodenum.
Combinations with H2-receptor antagonists are classified in A02B.
See also A03 - Drugs for functional gastrointestinal disorders.
Antacids in combination with liquorice root or linseed are classified in
A02A - Antacids.
Combinations with NSAIDs are classified in M01A.
A02BA H2-receptor antagonists
Ranitidine bismuth citrate is classified here, whereas other bismuth salts
are classified in A02BX.
The DDDs are based on treatment of peptic ulcers.
A02BB Prostaglandins
Misoprostol low strength tablets (25 mcg) used for induction of labour are
classified in G02AD06.
A02BC Proton pump inhibitors
Proton pump inhibitors in combination with domperidone are classified
here in 50-levels.
Potassium-competitive acid blockers e.g. vonoprazan are classified in this
group.
The DDDs are based on treatment of gastro-oesophageal reflux
disease.
A02BD Combinations for eradication of Helicobacter pylori

This group comprises fixed combination packages.
The DDDs for combination packages in this group are given a fixed
dose DDD, e.g. 6 tablets per day gives a DDD = 6 UD.
A02BX Other drugs for peptic ulcer and gastro-oesophageal reflux disease
(GORD)
Ranitidine bismuth citrate is classified in A02BA.
56
Alginic acid in combination with antacids (e.g. aluminium hydroxide,
calcium carbonate) is given the code A02BX13.
The DDD for alginic acid in combination with antacids (A02BX13) is
given in a fixed doses (10 tablets = 10 UD; 50 ml mixture = 10 UD).
A02X OTHER DRUGS FOR ACID RELATED DISORDERS

This group comprises preparations, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
A03 DRUGS FOR FUNCTIONAL GASTROINTESTINAL DISORDERS

A major part of the preparations in this group are combined preparations.
Preparations containing e.g. analgesics and antispasmodics could be
classified either in this group or in N02 - Analgesics. Combinations of
psycholeptics and antispasmodics could be classified in A03 or in N05 -
Psycholeptics etc. The main indication for the use of the combination will,
together with the relative effect of the active components, decide the
classification. In the treatment of pain caused by spasms, the spasmolytic
component must be judged as more important than the analgesic
component. Accordingly, analgesic/antispasmodic combinations should
be classified in A03 if the main effect of the preparation is the
antispasmodic action.
Combined preparations are classified in:
A03C - Antispasmodics in combination with psycholeptics
A03D - Antispasmodics in combination with analgesics
A03E - Antispasmodics and anticholinergics in combination with other
drugs
Antispasmodics, which are used specifically in the urogenital tractus, are
classified in G04BD - Drugs for urinary frequency and incontinence.
The DDD for the substances is usually equal for different routes of
administration (oral, parenteral or rectal) of the same compound and is
based on the oral dose.
A03A DRUGS FOR FUNCTIONAL GASTROINTESTINAL DISORDERS

Drugs for constipation are classified in A06.
Semisynthetic derivatives such as butylscopolamine, are classified in
A03B - Belladonna and derivatives, plain.
57
A03AA Synthetic anticholinergics, esters with tertiary amino group
A03AB Synthetic anticholinergics, quaternary ammonium compounds
Plain preparations for systemic use containing glycopyrronium bromide
are classified in this group. Preparations containing glycopyrronium in
combination with neostigmine are classified in N07AA51. Trospium see
G04BD and A03DA.
Pipenzolate in combination with silicones is classified in A03AB14.
The parenteral DDD for glycopyrronium bromide is based on the use as
premedication for anesthetic procedures.
A03AC Synthetic antispasmodics, amides with tertiary amines

A03AD Papaverine and derivatives
Combinations with sterculia are classified here. Systemic combinations
containing papaverine are classified at the plain level for papaverine.
Papaverine used for treatment of erectil dysfunction, see G04BE.
A03AE Serotonin receptor antagonists
A03AX Other drugs for functional gastrointestinal disorders
This group comprises drugs for functional gastrointestinal disorders, which
cannot be classified in the preceding groups.
Combinations of silicones and antispasmodics are classified in A03AX13 if
the main indication is flatulence.
Combinations of silicones and antacids are classified in A02AF.
Combinations of silicones and antipropulsives are classified in A07DA.
Trimethylphloroglucinol and combinations with trimethylphloroglucinol
are allowed at the 5th level A03AX12 - phloroglucinol.
Dimeticone is classified in A03AX13 - silicones.
58
A03B BELLADONNA AND DERIVATIVES, PLAIN
A03BA Belladonna alkaloids, tertiary amines
A03BB Belladonna alkaloids, semisynthetic, quaternary ammonium compounds
Combinations with codeine are classified in N02AA.
A03C ANTISPASMODICS IN COMBINATION WITH PSYCHOLEPTICS

Antispasmodics in combination with psycholeptics and other drugs (excl.
analgesics) are classified in this group.
Antispasmodics in combination with both psycholeptics and analgesics are
classified in A03EA.
The classification at the 5th levels is based on the antispasmodic
component. At each 5th level several psycholeptics may occur. When
classifying such combined products, it is necessary to look at the main
indication and the composition, to see if the preparation should be
classified in A03 or in N05 - Psycholeptics (see comments under A03).
A03CA Synthetic anticholinergic agents in combination with psycholeptics
General comments, see A03C.
Combinations with more than one antispasmodic substance are classified
in a ranking according to the ATC code. A substance classified in A03CA01
takes precedence over a substance classified in A03CA02 etc.
A03CB Belladonna and derivatives in combination with psycholeptics
General comments, see A03C.
Combinations with more than one antispasmodic are classified in a
ranking according to the ATC code. A substance classified in A03CB01
takes precedence over a substance classified in A03CB02 etc.
A03CC Other antispasmodics in combination with psycholeptics
This group comprises combined preparations with psycholeptics, which
are not covered by A03CA and A03CB.
A03D ANTISPASMODICS IN COMBINATION WITH ANALGESICS

This group is completely parallel to A03C.
The classification at the 5th levels is based on the antispasmodic
component. At each 5th level several analgesics may occur.
Antispasmodics in combination with analgesics and other drugs (excl.
psycholeptics) are classified in this group.
59
When classifying these combination products, it is necessary to look at the
indications and the composition to see if the preparation should be
classified in A03 or in N02 - Analgesics.
Opioid analgesics in combination with antispasmodics, see N02AG -
Opioids in combination with antispasmodics. Ethylmorphine is not
regarded as a narcotic in this context.
Antispasmodics in combination with psycholeptics and analgesics are
classified in A03EA.
A03DA Synthetic anticholinergic agents in combination with analgesics
General comments, see A03D.
ranking according to the ATC code. A substance classified in A03DA01
takes precedence over a substance classified in A03DA02 etc.
Combinations containing codeine are classified here, provided the codeine
content is less than 20 mg. See also N02AA.
Combinations of trospium and analgesics are classified here.
A03DB Belladonna and derivatives in combination with analgesics
General comments, see A03D.
ranking according to the ATC code. A substance classified in A03DB01
takes precedence over a substance classified in A03DB02 etc.
A03DC Other antispasmodics in combination with analgesics
This group comprises combined preparations with analgesics, which are
not covered by A03DA and A03DB.
A03E ANTISPASMODICS AND ANTICHOLINERGICS IN COMBINATION WITH

OTHER DRUGS
General comments, see A03.
This group comprises all combined preparations with antispasmodics and
anticholinergics, which are not covered by A03C or A03D.
A03EA Antispasmodics, psycholeptics and analgesics in combination
Antispasmodics in combination with psycholeptics, analgesics and other
agents are classified in this group.
60
A03ED Antispasmodics in combination with other drugs
A03F PROPULSIVES
A03FA Propulsives
Agents stimulating gastro-intestinal motility are classified here, e.g.
substituted benzamides.
Trimebutine is classified in A03AA.
Levosulpiride is classified in N05AL07.
Domperidone in combination with a proton pump inhibitor is classified in
A02BC.
A04 ANTIEMETICS AND ANTINAUSEANTS

A04A ANTIEMETICS AND ANTINAUSEANTS
Antihistamines, which are often used as antiemetics, are classified in R06 -
Antihistamines for systemic use.
Metoclopramide is classified in A03FA.
Combinations with analgesics are classified in N02 - Analgesics.
Antivertigo preparations, see N07C.
Antipsychotics, see N05A.
A04AA Serotonin (5HT3) antagonists
The DDDs are based on antiemetic treatment. The DDD for
palonosetron is based on single dose treatment.
A04AD Other antiemetics

Fosaprepitant, a prodrug of aprepitant, is classified together with the
parent drug in A04AD12.
Droperidol used for prevention of nausea and vomiting is classified in
N05AD.
61
The DDD for scopolamine plaster is one plaster (i.e. 1 UD). This DDD
is based on prophylaxis of motion sickness.
DDDs for other substances classified in this group are based on
antiemetic treatment.
The DDDs for aprepitant/fosaprepitant (A04AD12) are based on
treatment with 165 mg tablets/150 mg injection given as a single
dose on day one of the treatment regimen. The DDD for rolapitant is
also based on the single dose treatment on day one of the treatment
regimen.
A05 BILE AND LIVER THERAPY

A05A BILE THERAPY
A05AA Bile acids and derivatives
Preparations classified in this group are primarily bile acid preparations,
but various combinations, e.g. with spasmolytics, can also be included in
each 5th level.
A05AB Preparations for biliary tract therapy
A05AX Other drugs for bile therapy
This group comprises other drugs for bile therapy, which cannot be
classified in the preceding groups.
A05B LIVER THERAPY, LIPOTROPICS

A05BA Liver therapy
Thioctic acid is classified in A16AX.
Preparations containing silibinin are classified at the same ATC 5th level as
silymarin.
A05C DRUGS FOR BILE THERAPY AND LIPOTROPICS IN COMBINATION
A06 DRUGS FOR CONSTIPATION

A06A DRUGS FOR CONSTIPATION
All agents used for treatment of constipation (regardless of indication) are
classified here.
The agents are mainly subdivided according to mode of action. All
enemas are classified in A06AG, regardless of mode of action.
62
Some combination products are classified at separate levels. These are
mentioned in the respective ATC group.
Otherwise combination products are classified at separate 5th levels using
the corresponding 50-series.
Laxatives in combination with centrally acting antiobesity agents are
classified in A08A - Antiobesity preparations, excl. diet products.
A06AA Softeners, emollients
This group comprises preparations containing liquid paraffin, docusate
sodium etc. Docusate potassium is classified at the same 5th level as
docusate sodium.
Combinations with contact laxatives are classified in A06AB, except all
liquid paraffin combinations, which are classified in A06AA.
DDDs for e.g. liquid paraffin and castor oil are given using the following
unit: g (gram), (1 g = 1 ml for all practical purposes). Preparations
classified in A06AA51 - liquid paraffin, combinations, are all given the
same DDD = 3 UD (15 ml), independent of liquid paraffin
concentration.
A06AB Contact laxatives

This group comprises agents, which mainly inhibit the absorption of
electrolytes and water through a specific pharmacological mechanism.
Combinations with osmotically acting laxatives are classified here.
Combinations with bulk producing laxatives are classified in
A06AC - Bulk-forming laxatives.
Gas producing rectal preparations and glycerol suppositories, see A06AX -
Other drugs for constipation.
Phenolphthalein in combination with liquid paraffin, see A06AA.
Combined packages with tablets and enemas are classified in A06AG.
A major part of the products classified in this group are various
combinations of two or more contact laxatives. These are classified at
separate 5th levels:
A06AB20 - contact laxatives in combination
A06AB30 - contact laxatives in combination with belladonna alkaloids
Otherwise combination products are classified at separate 5th levels using
63
Preparations containing bark (cortex) of Rhamnus pursiana and Rhamnus
frangula are classified in A06AB07 cascara.
A06AC Bulk-forming laxatives
This group comprises linseed and psylla seed products, methyl cellulose
etc.
Lactulose, see A06AD.
Products containing linseed in combination with antacids are classified in
A02A.
Products containing sterculia in combination with alverine are classified in
A03AX.
A06AD Osmotically acting laxatives
This group comprises various saline purgatives and e.g. lactulose, which is
primarily considered as an osmotically acting substance.
Combinations with contact laxatives are classified in A06AB.
Mineral salts in combinations are classified in A06AD10.
Combinations of lactulose with liquid paraffin should be classified in
A06AD61.
Macrogol in combination with electrolytes is classified in A06AD65.
Magnesium hydroxide is classified as an antacid in A02AA.
Magnesium in combination with albumin tannate are classified in A07XA.
The DDD for macrogol refers to macrogol 4000.
A06AG Enemas
All enemas and laxative rectal solutions are classified in this group,
regardless of mode of action.
Combined packages containing tablets and enemas are classified in this
group.
Some 5th levels for plain substances also include combinations, e.g.:
A06AG10 - docusate sodium- and e.g. sorbitol or glycerol
A06AG11 - sodium lauryl sulfoacetate and e.g. sodium citrate
Sodium laurilsulfate is also classified in A06AG11.
The DDDs for enemas classified in this group are 1 enema.
64
A06AH Peripheral opioid receptor antagonists
A06AX Other drugs for constipation
This group comprises all agents, which cannot be classified in the preceding
groups, e.g. lubiprostone, linaclotide, tenapanor and prucalopride.
The DDD for linaclotide is based on treatment of irritable bowel
syndrome with constipation.
A07 ANTIDIARRHEALS, INTESTINAL ANTIINFLAMMATORY/ANTIINFECTIVE

AGENTS
A07A INTESTINAL ANTIINFECTIVES
This group comprises locally acting antiinfectives. Antiinfectives for
systemic use, see J - Antiinfectives for systemic use.
See also P - Antiparasitic products, insecticides and repellents.
A07AA Antibiotics
Vancomycin and colistin for oral therapy are classified in this group as they
are used in enterocolitis. Vancomycin injection/infusion is classified in
J01XA - Glycopeptide antibacterials, and colistin injection/infusion in
J01XB - Polymyxins.
Most of the combined products containing more than one antibiotic,
contain neomycin. Neomycin is given classification priority, thus all
combined products containing neomycin and other antibiotics should be
classified in A07AA51 - neomycin, combinations.
Paromomycin injection used in the treatment of leishmaniasis is classified
here.
The DDDs are based on treatment of intestinal infections.
A07AB Sulfonamides
The DDDs are based on preoperative prophylaxis of intestinal
infections.
A07AC Imidazole derivatives

The DDDs are based on treatment of gastrointestinal mycosis.
A07AX Other intestinal antiinfectives

This group comprises antiinfectives, which cannot be classified in A07AA-C.
65
A07B INTESTINAL ADSORBENTS
Combinations with intestinal antiinfectives are classified in A07A.
A07BA Charcoal preparations
The DDD for charcoal preparations is based on treatment of common
diarrhea.
A07BB Bismuth preparations

See also A02BX - Other drugs for peptic ulcer and gastro-oesophageal reflux
disease (GORD).
No ATC 5th levels are assigned in this group.
A07BC Other intestinal adsorbents
This group comprises all other intestinal adsorbents.
Combinations with albumin tannate are classified in A07XA.
A07C ELECTROLYTES WITH CARBOHYDRATES

A07CA Oral rehydration salt formulations
The DDDs are mainly based on use in children.
A07D ANTIPROPULSIVES
A07DA Antipropulsives
This group comprises agents which reduce gastrointestinal motility, e.g.
diphenoxylate and loperamide. Loperamide and loperamide oxide are
classified at the two separate 5th levels.
A07DA01 - diphenoxylate - includes combinations with atropine.
A07DA02 - opium - includes also combinations with belladonna and/or
bismuth subgallate, albumin etc.
A07DA52 - morphine, combinations includes combinations with e.g.
aluminum hydroxide, belladonna alkaloids and kaolin used as
antipropulsives. Morphine combinations used in the treatment of pain are
classified in N02AA51.
Combinations with antiflatulents are classified here.
The DDDs are based on treatment of acute diarrhea.
66
A07E INTESTINAL ANTIINFLAMMATORY AGENTS
A07EA Corticosteroids acting locally
Enemas and rectal foams for treatment of e.g. ulcerative colitis are
classified here. Oral corticosteroids solely indicated for the treatment of
intestinal inflammatory diseases are also classified here.
Sublingual formulations of budesonide for the treatment of eosinophilic
esophagitis and oral formulations of budesonide for the treatment of
primary immunoglobulin A nephropathy are classified in this group.
The DDDs are given as 1 enema. The DDD for hydrocortisone rectal
foam is given in amount of active substance.
The DDD for oral budesonide is based on the treatment of morbus
Crohn. The DDD for the subligual formulations of budesonide are
based on the treatment of eosinophilic esophagitis.
A07EB Antiallergic agents, excl. corticosteroids

Cromoglicic acid for oral use in food allergy is classified in this group.
The DDD is based on treatment of food allergy.
A07EC Aminosalicylic acid and similar agents

Some preparations classified in this group are also used for treatment of
rheumatoid arthritis.
The DDDs are based on treatment of colitis ulcerosa and morbus
Crohn.
A07F ANTIDIARRHEAL MICROORGANISMS

A07FA Antidiarrheal microorganisms
Preparations with e.g. lactic acid producing organisms are classified in this
group.
The DDDs are given in UDs (e.g. numbers of tablets).
A07X OTHER ANTIDIARRHEALS

A07XA Other antidiarrheals
Combinations with pectin and magnesium peroxide are classified here.
Telotristat for the treatment of carcinoid syndrome diarrhea is classified in
A16AX.
67
A08 ANTIOBESITY PREPARATIONS, EXCL. DIET PRODUCTS
A08A ANTIOBESITY PREPARATIONS, EXCL. DIET PRODUCTS
Low-energy diets, see V06AA.
A08AA Centrally acting antiobesity products
Amfetamine, which is commonly used in psychiatry, is classified in N06B -
Psychostimulants, agents used for ADHD and nootropics.
Fenfluramine indicated for the treatment of seizures associated with
Dravet syndrome is classified in N03AX - Other antiepileptics.
A08AB Peripherally acting antiobesity products
A08AX Other antiobesity drugs
Liraglutide and semaglutide used as antiobesity drugs are classified as
blood glucose lowering drugs in A10BJ.
A09 DIGESTIVES, INCL. ENZYMES

A09A DIGESTIVES, INCL. ENZYMES
A09AA Enzyme preparations
Only enzymes used in digestion disorders are classified in this group.
Other enzymes, see B06AA - Enzymes, and D03BA - Proteolytic enzymes.
Enzyme preparations, which are indicated to treat inflammatory
conditions, are classified in M09AB - Enzymes.
Combinations of digestive enzymes are classified in A09AA02
multienzymes (lipase, protease etc.).
Combinations of digestive enzymes and other agents (e.g. silicone
compounds and spasmolytics) are classified in this group if the main
indication is digestion disorders.
Cholagogues are classified in A05 - Bile and liver therapy.
DDDs can be difficult to establish because of great variations in enzyme
content. The DDDs are based on average recommended doses given in
different drug catalogues. Most of the preparations are combinations
of different enzymes, and the DDDs are therefore given in UDs. Some
specific products have been given a DDD, see list of DDDs for
combination products, www.whocc.no.
A09AB Acid preparations

A09AC Enzyme and acid preparations, combinations
68
A10 DRUGS USED IN DIABETES
A10A INSULINS AND ANALOGUES
This group comprises both human - and animal insulins.
Insulin preparations are classified at 4 different 4th levels, according to
onset and duration of action. Each 4th level is differentiated in 5th levels
according to origin of insulin.
Products consisting of, e.g. beef and pork insulin, are classified as
combinations (30-levels) at each 4th level according to onset and duration
of action.
The DDD for insulins is 40 units.
A10AB Insulins and analogues for injection, fast-acting

A10AC Insulins and analogues for injection, intermediate-acting
A10AD Insulins and analogues for injection, intermediate- or long-acting
combined with fast-acting
Combinations of fast acting insulins with intermediate-acting or long-
acting insulins are classified in the 5th levels here.
A10AE Insulins and analogues for injection, long-acting
A10AF Insulins and analogues for inhalation
A10B BLOOD GLUCOSE LOWERING DRUGS, EXCL. INSULINS

Fixed combinations of blood glucose lowering drugs and lipid modifying
agentes are classified here.
A10BA Biguanides
A10BB Sulfonylureas
The DDD for micronized glibenclamide is lower compared to non-
micronized formulations, due to higher bioavailability.
The DDD for gliclazide is based on the modified release formulation.
A10BC Sulfonamides (heterocyclic)

A10BD Combinations of oral blood glucose lowering drugs
Combinations with thioctic acid are allowed in A10BD05.
69
It has been considered most appropriate to assign fixed DDDs based on
the average use of the different combinations without considering and
comparing the strengths of the various components. One UD is the
fixed DDD for products dosed as 1 tablet daily whereas two UD is the
fixed DDD for products dosed as 2 tablets daily. The assigned DDDs
cannot always be compared with the DDDs assigned for plain
preparations.
See list of DDDs for combined products, www.whocc.no.
A10BF Alpha glucosidase inhibitors

A10BG Thiazolidinediones
The DDD for troglitazone is based on combination therapy. The DDDs
for rosiglitazone and pioglitazone are based on monotherapy.
A10BH Dipeptidyl peptidase 4 (DPP-4) inhibitors

A10BJ Glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) analogues
A10BK Sodium-glucose co-transporter 2 (SGLT2) inhibitors
Inhibitors of SGLT1 and SGLT2, e.g. sotagliflozin, are also classified here.
A10BX Other blood glucose lowering drugs, excl. insulins
Low strength tablets (e.g. 0.8 mg) of bromocriptine are classified in
G02CB01.
Nateglinide in combination with thioctic acid is classified in A10BX03.
A10X OTHER DRUGS USED IN DIABETES

A10XA Aldose reductase inhibitors
A11 VITAMINS
Vitamins constitute a comprehensive group of therapeutic and
prophylactic preparations. Before classifying any product it is important
to be familiar with the main subdivision of the group.
It may be necessary to consider whether a product is a vitamin
preparation with iron or an iron preparation with vitamins, a mineral
preparation with vitamins or a vitamin preparation with minerals, or if the
product should be regarded as a tonic etc. As an aid to such
considerations, guidelines are given at each sublevel.
Vitamin B12 is classified in B03 - Antianemic preparations.
70
Vitamin K is classified in B02 - Antihemorrhagics.
Vitamins administered as i.v. solution additives, see B05XC.
Some definitions:
Multivitamins: Products containing minimum vitamins A, B, C and D. One
B-vitamin is sufficient.
B-complex: Products containing minimum thiamine, riboflavine,
pyridoxine, nicotinamide. The products may contain other B-vitamins.
Combinations of vitamins, vitamins with minerals or other substances that
do not belong to other 4th levels and are mainly indicated as food
supplements, see A11J.
A11A MULTIVITAMINS, COMBINATIONS

The DDDs are based on prophylaxis. For simplicity, the DDDs for oral
formulations are given as fixed doses (1 tablet = 1 UD; 30 ml mixture =
6 UD).
A11AA Multivitamins with minerals

The group is subdivided:
A11AA01 - multivitamins and iron
A11AA02 - multivitamins and calcium
A11AA03 - multivitamins and other minerals, incl. combinations
A11AA04 - multivitamins and trace elements
In A11AA01, 02 and 03, combinations with trace elements are allowed.
In A11AA04 only trace elements are allowed in addition to multivitamins.
Combinations with other substances, e.g. caffeine, are classified in A11AB.
Cholin, biotin, inositol and para-amino benzoic acid are regarded as
vitamins and are allowed in preparations classified in A11AA.
A11AA01 multivitamins and iron
Preparations containing multivitamins and sub-therapeutic doses of iron
are classified in this group.
Sub-therapeutic doses of iron are defined as 5-30 mg of Fe2+ per defined
daily dose, with corresponding limits for the various Fe3+ salts, if the main
indication is not "iron deficiency". Preparations containing more than 30
mg Fe2+ (or corresponding doses of Fe3+) are classified as iron preparations
(B03A) regardless of therapeutic use.
See also A11AA.
71
A11AA02 multivitamins and calcium
Preparations containing multivitamins and sub-therapeutic doses of
calcium are classified in this group, e.g. a calcium content of up to 500 mg
calcium carbonate per tablet have been allowed.
See also A11AA.
Calcium preparations, see A12A.
A11AA03 multivitamins and other minerals, incl. combinations
Preparations containing multivitamins and sub-therapeutic doses of one
or more mineral are classified in this group. Definitions of sub-therapeutic
doses of iron and calcium, see A11AA01 and A11AA02. See also A11AA.
Mineral supplements, see A12.
A11AA04 multivitamins and trace elements
Preparations containing multivitamins and trace elements are classified in
this group. No other combinations should occur in this group.
A11AB Multivitamins, other combinations
This group comprises all combined preparations with multivitamins, which
are not classified in A11AA.
Preparations containing caffeine etc. are classified in this group.
Preparations containing cholin, biotin, inositol, para-amino benzoic acid
etc. should be classified in A11AA.
A11B MULTIVITAMINS, PLAIN

A11BA Multivitamins, plain
Only plain multivitamin preparations are allowed.
The DDDs are based on prophylaxis. For simplicity, the DDDs are given
as fixed doses (1 tablet = 1 UD; 30 ml mixture = 6 UD).
A11C VITAMIN A AND D, INCL. COMBINATIONS OF THE TWO

Combinations with trace elements are allowed. Other combinations, see
A11J - Other vitamin products, combinations.
See also A12 - Mineral supplements.
A11CA Vitamin A, plain
The DDD is based on treatment of vitamin A deficiency.
72
A11CB Vitamin A and D in combination
Cod-liver oil products are classified in this group.
A11CC Vitamin D and analogues
Vitamin D and analogues may be regarded as hormones, but are classified
in this group. Calcium homeostasis, see H05.
Paricalcitol and doxercalciferol indicated for the prevention and treatment
of secondary hyperparathyroidism are classified in H05BX - Other anti-
parathyroid agents.
Oral formulations of calcifediol, solely indicated for treatment of renal
secondary hyperparathyroidism are classified in H05BX - Other anti-
parathyroid agents, while all other pharmaceutical formulations of
calcifediol are classified in A11CC06.
Colecalciferol in combination with sodium fluoride indicated for
prophylaxis of rickets and caries is classified in A11CC55.
The DDDs are based on therapeutic use. No DDD is established for
ergocalciferol due to great differences between doses used for various
indications. The DDD of 20 mcg colecalciferol corresponds to 800 IU.
A11D VITAMIN B1, PLAIN AND IN COMBINATION WITH VITAMIN B6 AND B12
Combinations with trace elements are allowed. Other combinations see
A11J - Other vitamin products, combinations.
A11DA Vitamin B1, plain
The DDDs are based on treatment of vitamin B1 deficiency.
A11DB Vitamin B1 in combination with vitamin B6 and/or vitamin B12
Combinations with vitamin B2 are also allowed in this group.
For vitamin B1 in combination with vitamin B6 and/or vitamin B12, DDDs
are only established for parenteral preparations, based on the volume
of one ampoule. The DDDs are given in UDs (1 UD = 1 ml).
A11E VITAMIN B-COMPLEX, INCL. COMBINATIONS

Definition of vitamin B-complex, see A11 - Vitamins.
A11EA - Vitamin B-complex, plain
A11EB - Vitamin B-complex with vitamin C
73
A11EC - Vitamin B-complex with minerals
A11ED - Vitamin B-complex with anabolic steroids
A11EX - Vitamin B-complex, other combinations
Combinations with trace elements are allowed. Vitamin B-complex in
combination with other vitamins than vitamin C, see A11J - Other vitamin
products, combinations.
DDDs are based on prophylaxis. DDDs are given as fixed doses (1
tablet = 1 UD; 30 ml mixture = 6 UD). DDDs for parenteral
preparations are based on the volume of one ampoule. The DDDs for
these preparations are given in UDs (1 UD = 1 ml).
A11EA Vitamin B-complex, plain

This group comprises plain vitamin B-complex preparations, also in
combination with liver extract. Liver extract preparations, see also
B03BA - Vitamin B12 (cyanocobalamin and derivatives). See also A11E.
A11EB Vitamin B-complex with vitamin C
This group comprises all combinations of vitamin B-complex and vitamin
C. Combinations with anabolic steroids, see A11ED.
See also A11E, A11ED and A11EX.
A11EC Vitamin B-complex with minerals
Preparations containing vitamin B-complex and sub-therapeutic doses of
one or more mineral are classified in this group.
See also A11E.
Mineral supplements, see A12.
A11ED Vitamin B-complex with anabolic steroids
Preparations containing vitamin B-complex and anabolic steroids are
classified in this group. Even combinations containing vitamin C, minerals
or other substances, e.g. caffeine are classified in this group.
A11EX Vitamin B-complex, other combinations
This group comprises preparations with vitamin B-complex (plain or in
combination with vitamin C or minerals) and other substances, e.g.
caffeine.
74
A11G ASCORBIC ACID (VITAMIN C), INCL. COMBINATIONS
Other preparations with vitamin C, see A11EB - Vitamin B-complex with
vitamin C, and A11J - Other vitamin products, combinations.
Combinations with analgesics are classified in N02B.
The DDD refers to the assumed daily requirement.
For combination products, the DDDs are given as fixed doses for all
tablets (1 tablet = 1 UD).
A11GA Ascorbic acid (vitamin C), plain

Combinations with trace elements only, are allowed.
A11GB Ascorbic acid (vitamin C), combinations
This group comprises combinations with e.g. minerals.
Preparations containing ascorbic acid and calcium should be classified in
A12AX - Calcium, combinations with vitamin D and/or other drugs - if they
are used in calcium deficiency or osteoporosis.
A11H OTHER PLAIN VITAMIN PREPARATIONS

A11HA Other plain vitamin preparations
Vitamin B12, see B03BA.
Vitamin K, see B02 - Antihemorrhagics.
Combinations with trace elements are allowed. Other combinations, see
A11DB and A11J.
DDDs are established only for tocopherol, pyridoxine and
nicotinamide, and refer to assumed daily requirement in vitamin
deficiency.
A11J OTHER VITAMIN PRODUCTS, COMBINATIONS

A11JA - Combinations of vitamins
A11JB - Vitamins with minerals
A11JC - Vitamins, other combinations
Combinations with trace elements are allowed.
The DDDs are given as fixed doses (1 tablet = 1 UD; 30 ml mixture = 6
UD), except for concentrated ACD vitamin drops.
75
A11JA Combinations of vitamins
This group comprises all combinations of vitamins with no addition of
other substances, not covered by the preceding groups.
A11JB Vitamins with minerals
This group comprises all combinations of vitamins with minerals in sub-
therapeutic doses, not covered by the preceding groups. Definitions of
sub-therapeutic doses of iron and calcium, see A11AA01 and A11AA02.
A11JC Vitamins, other combinations
This group comprises all products, which contain vitamins (with or without
minerals) and in addition other substances, e.g. caffeine. Combinations
with melatonin not indicated for sleep disorders are classified here.
Combinations with folic acid are classified in B03BB if "folic acid
deficiency" is the main indication.
This group contains products, which may also be regarded as tonics. No
sharp line has been drawn between these two groups.
Tonics are classified in A13. The vitamin content of tonics should be
rather low.
A12 MINERAL SUPPLEMENTS

This group contains mineral supplements used for treatment of mineral
deficiency. All parenteral solutions of electrolytes are classified in B05B or
in B05X. Magnesium carbonate used for treatment of mineral deficiency
is classified in A02AA01.
A12A CALCIUM
A12AA Calcium
Plain calcium preparations, incl. bone extracts are classified in this group.
Calcium acetate mainly used for the treatment of hyperphosphatemia, is
classified in V03AE07.
See also B05X - I.v. solution additives.
Combinations of different calcium salts are given the following ATC code:
A12AA20. Small amounts of calcium carbonate (i.e. 300 mg per tablet)
are, however, allowed at each 5th level for plain calcium preparations.
Combinations of calcium and vitamin D are classified in A12AX.
76
The combination of calcium acetate and magnesium carbonate is classified
in V03AE.
Antacids with calcium carbonate are classified in A02AC.
See also:
A11AA02 - multivitamins and calcium
A11EC - Vitamin B-complex with minerals
A11GB01 - ascorbic acid (vit C) and calcium
A11JB - Vitamins with minerals
The DDDs are based on treatment of calcium deficiency and
osteoporosis.
A12AX Calcium, combinations with vitamin D and/or other drugs
This group comprises all combined calcium preparations used in the

treatment of calcium deficiency conditions and osteoporosis. Many of
these are combinations with vitamins, especially vitamin A and D.
Combination packages of calcium and bisphosphonates are classified in
M05BB.
Combinations with fluoride are classified in A12CD.
A12B POTASSIUM
A12BA Potassium
This group comprises preparations used as potassium supplements.
This group comprises also all combined potassium preparations used in
the treatment of potassium deficiency conditions. Potassium citrate
preparations indicated for e.g. treatment of renal tubular acidosis with
calcium stones are classified here.
Small non-therapeutic amounts of potassium hydrogencarbonate are
allowed at each level of plain potassium salts.
Potassium, combinations with other drugs, are classified at separate 5th
levels using the corresponding 50-series.
Diuretics and potassium in combination, see C03 - Diuretics.
See also B05 - Blood substitutes and perfusion solutions.
The DDDs are based on treatment of potassium deficiency and
correspond to a potassium content of about 40 mmol potassium.
77
A12C OTHER MINERAL SUPPLEMENTS
This group comprises other minerals.
See also B05 - Blood substitutes and perfusion solutions.
A12CA Sodium
The DDD has been set to 1 g NaCl.
A12CB Zinc
The DDD is based on treatment of zinc deficiency.
A12CC Magnesium
Combinations with subtherapeutic amounts of vitamins are included in

this group.
The DDDs for the various magnesium salts are equivalent to an
assumed daily requirement of 300 mg magnesium (oral dose). The
DDD for some of the oral formulations are higher than the parenteral
formulations due to lower bioavailability.
A12CD Fluoride
This group comprises preparations used e.g. in the treatment of
osteoporosis. Fluoride used in caries prophylaxis, see A01AA - Caries
prophylatic agents.
Bisphosphonates are classified in M05B.
Calcitonin is classified in H05BA.
Calcium preparations are classified in A12A.
Combinations with calcium are classified here.
The DDD is based on treatment of osteoporosis.
A12CE Selenium
The DDDs are based on treatment of selenium deficiency and is
expressed as amount of selenium (Se).
A12CX Other mineral products
78
A13 TONICS
A13A TONICS
This group comprises preparations used as tonics etc., if preparations do
not fill the requirements to be classified as iron preparations, vitamin
preparations etc.
All mixtures classified in this group are given a fixed DDD
(30 ml = 6 UD).
A14 ANABOLIC AGENTS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

A14A ANABOLIC STEROIDS
Anabolic steroids are subdivided in different 4th levels according to
chemical structure.
Anabolic steroids used exclusively in cancer therapy, see
L - Antineoplastic and immunomodulating agents.
The DDDs are based on e.g. treatment of anemia.
A14AA Androstan derivatives
Systemic formulations (e.g. tablets/injections) of prasterone are classified
here while prasterone for vaginal use is classified in G03XX.
A14AB Estren derivatives
A14B OTHER ANABOLIC AGENTS

This group comprises all other anabolic agents which cannot be classified
in the preceding groups.
A15 APPETITE STIMULANTS

This group comprises preparations only used as appetite stimulants.
A number of drugs with other main actions may have appetite stimulating
properties.
Cyproheptadine, also used as an appetite stimulant in children, is
classified in R06AX. Pizotifen is classified in N02CX.
No DDDs are established in this group.
79
A16 OTHER ALIMENTARY TRACT AND METABOLISM PRODUCTS
A16A OTHER ALIMENTARY TRACT AND METABOLISM PRODUCTS
This group comprises all products acting on the alimentary tract and
metabolism which cannot be classified in the preceding groups. V03 - All
other therapeutic products, should also be considered.
Nutrients are classified in V06 - General nutrients.
A16AA Amino acids and derivatives
Agents used in various metabolic deficiency states are classified here,
when this is considered to be the main indication e.g. levocarnitine.
Tryptophan and oxitriptan are classified in N06A.
Metreleptin used for treatment of complications of leptin deficiency in
patients with generalised lipodystrophy is classified in this group.
Glutamine for treatment of sickle cell disease is classified here.
The DDD of levocarnitine is based on treatment of primary carnitine
deficiency.
A16AB Enzymes
This group includes gene therapy products resulting in the expression of

specific enzymes.
A16AX Various alimentary tract and metabolism products
Thioctic acid is classified in this group.
This group includes gene therapy products resulting in the expression of
specific proteins.
The DDD for zinc acetate is expressed as the amount of zinc (Zn).
The DDD for nitisinone is based on the treatment of children with a
bodyweight of 20 kg.
The DDD for thioctic acid is based on the treatment of patients with
peripheral diabetic polyneuropathy.
The DDD for miglustat is based on the treatment of Gauchers disease.
80
B BLOOD AND BLOOD FORMING ORGANS
B01 ANTITHROMBOTIC AGENTS

A Antithrombotic agents
B02 ANTIHEMORRHAGICS
A Antifibrinolytics
B Vitamin K and other hemostatics
B03 ANTIANEMIC PREPARATIONS

A Iron preparations
B Vitamin B12 and folic acid
X Other antianemic preparations
B05 BLOOD SUBSTITUTES AND PERFUSION SOLUTIONS

A Blood and related products
B I.v. solutions
C Irrigating solutions
D Peritoneal dialytics
X I.v. solution additives
Z Hemodialytics and hemofiltrates
B06 OTHER HEMATOLOGICAL AGENTS

A Other hematological agents
81
B BLOOD AND BLOOD FORMING ORGANS
B01 ANTITHROMBOTIC AGENTS
B01A ANTITHROMBOTIC AGENTS
B01AA Vitamin K antagonists
This group comprises vitamin K antagonists such as dicoumarol, warfarin
etc.
The DDDs are based on prophylaxis of thrombosis.
B01AB Heparin group

This group comprises heparin preparations, including products for non-
therapeutic use, e.g. for rinsing of indwelling vein cannulas. Heparin
sodium and heparin calcium are classified at the same 5th level, i.e.
B01AB01. The low molecular weight heparins are classified at separate
5th levels.
Both human-derived and recombinant products of antithrombin III are

classified in B01AB02.
The DDDs of nonfractionated heparin and antithrombin are based on

prophylaxis of thrombosis and pulmonary emboli, and given in
international units (U). The DDDs for the different low molecular
weight heparins are assigned according to their recommended dose in
prophylaxis of deep vein thrombosis in moderate risk patients. Since
the anti Xa activity is a major determinant of the anticoagulant activity
of low molecular weight heparins the DDDs are given in international
units based on anti Xa activity.
The DDD for sulodexide is expressed in lipoprotein lipase releasing
units (LSU).
B01AC Platelet aggregation inhibitors excl. heparin

Acetylsalicylic acid preparations specifically intended for use as
antithrombotic agents are classified in this group. This exception from the
basic principle of only one code for each route of administration is made
because of the extensive use of acetylsalicylic acid both as an
antithrombotic agent and as an analgesic. Whether an acetylsalicylic acid
product should be classified in this group or in N02BA, should be decided
at the national level based on the main indication of the product.
Lysine acetylsalicylate is classified at the same 5th level as acetylsalicylic
acid.
82
Sulfinpyrazone is classified in M04AB. Alprostadil is classified in C01EA
and G04BE.
Combinations of acetylsalicylic acid and statins are classified in C10BX.
Combinations of acetylsalicylic acid, ACE inhibitors and statins are
classified in C10BX.
Combinations of acetylsalicylic acid and beta blocking agents are classified
in C07FX.
Prostaglandines are classified in this group while other agents used for
pulmonary arterial hypertension are classified in C02KX or in G04BE.
The DDDs are based on prophylaxis of thrombosis. The DDDs of
acetylsalicylic acid and carbasalate calcium are given as 1 tablet
independent of tablet strength. This is due to the great variations
between different countries in the dosages/strengths recommended
for prophylaxis of thrombosis.
The DDD of iloprost is based on treatment of peripheral vascular
disease.
The DDD of vorapaxar is based on the content of one tablet (2.08 mg).
The DDD of selexipag is based on treatment of pulmonary arterial
hypertension.
For combinations products, see list of DDDs for combinations,
www.whocc.no.
B01AD Enzymes
The DDDs of streptokinase, alteplase, anistreplase and reteplase are
based on thrombolytic treatment in connection with acute myocardial
infarction. The DDD of urokinase is based on treatment of acute lung
emboli. The DDDs are either expressed in international units or gram.
B01AE Direct thrombin inhibitors

The DDD for dabigatran etexilate is based on treatment of patients
with NVAF (nonvalvular atrial fibrillation).
B01AF Direct factor Xa inhibitors

The DDDs are based on the treatment of patients with NVAF
(nonvalvular atrial fibrillation).
83
B01AX Other antithrombotic agents
The DDD for caplacizumab is 10 mg (P) based on the European labelling

and equivalent to 11 mg in the USA labelling.
B02 ANTIHEMORRHAGICS
B02A ANTIFIBRINOLYTICS
This group comprises agents, which inhibit fibrinolytic activity.
Combinations with vitamin K, see B02B - Vitamin K and other hemostatics.
The DDDs are based on treatment of hemorrhage associated with
fibrinolysis.
B02AA Amino acids

B02AB Proteinase inhibitors
Combinations with aprotinin used as local hemostatics are classified in
B02BC30.
B02B VITAMIN K AND OTHER HEMOSTATICS

The DDDs are based on treatment of hemorrhage associated with
different deficiency states (e.g. vitamin K deficiency, deficiency of
different blood coagulation factors etc.).
B02BA Vitamin K
B02BB Fibrinogen
Preparations containing human fibrinogen for systemic use are classified
here. B02BB01 is reserved for systemic formulations only.
B02BC Local hemostatics
This group comprises gauze, tampons etc. impregnated with hemostatic
agents. Local hemostatics used in dentistry, see A01AD - Other agents for
local oral treatment. Epinephrine injection, see C01C - Cardiac stimulants
excl. cardiac glycosides. Tissue adhesives, e.g. cyanoacrylate based
adhesives, are classified in V03AK. Combinations of e.g. human
fibrinogen, aprotinin, thrombin and collagen are classified in B02BC30.
No DDDs are established for local hemostatics classified in this group.
84
B02BD Blood coagulation factors
This group comprises all blood coagulation factors, thrombin etc., incl.
preparations for local use, and their combinations.
For systemic formulations of fibrinogen (factor I), see - B02BB - Fibrinogen.
Prothrombin complexes containg three or all four factors are classified in
B02BD01 coagulation factor IX, II, VII and X.
Both human derived and recombinant factor VIII and factor IX products
will be classified in B02BD02 - coagulation factor VIII and
B02BD04 - coagulation factor IX, respectively.
No DDDs are established for blood coagulation factors. The use of
blood coagulation factors could be measured in blood factor units (IU).
B02BX Other systemic hemostatics

This group comprises systemic hemostatics, which cannot be classified
elsewhere.
The DDD for avatrombopag is based on the starting dose in the
treatment of chronic immune thrombocytopenia.
B03 ANTIANEMIC PREPARATIONS

B03A IRON PREPARATIONS
This group comprises all plain iron preparations and all combination
products containing more than 30 mg Fe2+ (or corresponding amounts of
Fe3+ salts) per defined daily dose (DDD) of the product, regardless of
therapeutic use.
Combined preparations with 30 mg or less Fe2+ per DDD should be
classified as vitamin preparations in group A11 or as tonics in group A13.
All iron preparations with "iron deficiency" as the main indication are
classified in B03A, regardless of the amount of iron salts.
Only plain preparations should be classified in the groups B03AA, B03AB
and B03AC. Combinations with stabilizing agents (e.g. ascorbic acid) are
allowed at each 5th level. Combinations with e.g. laxatives are classified
at separate 5th levels by using the 50-series.
Other combinations, see B03AD and B03AE.
85
B03AA Iron bivalent, oral preparations
The DDDs are based on treatment of iron deficiency anemia. The DDDs
are established according to amount of Fe2+ and are equal for all
compounds regardless of iron salt (i.e. the DDD corresponds to 0.2 g
Fe2+).
B03AB Iron trivalent, oral preparations

Ferric citrate mainly used for the treatment of hyperphosphatemia, is
classified in V03AE08.
The DDDs are based on treatment of iron deficiency anemia. Separate
DDDs are established for the different trivalent iron salts. The DDDs are
expressed in grams of Fe3+.
B03AC Iron, parenteral preparations

The DDDs are based on treatment of iron deficiency anemia. The DDDs
are established according to amount of Fe and are equal for all
compounds (i.e. the DDD corresponds to 0.1 g Fe).
B03AD Iron in combination with folic acid

This group comprises iron in combination with folic acid. Preparations
containing additional substances, see B03AE.
Historically:
The DDDs have been based on prophylaxis of iron deficiency anemia
and folic acid deficiency during pregnancy (i.e. about half the iron dose
for treatment of anemia).
B03AE Iron in other combinations

This group comprises preparations, which in addition to iron or iron and
folic acid contain other substances.
B03AE01 - iron, vitamin B12 and folic acid
Intrinsic factor and/or liver extract are also allowed in this
group
B03AE02 - iron, multivitamins and folic acid
B03AE03 - iron and multivitamins
B03AE04 - iron, multivitamins and minerals
B03AE10 - various combinations
86
This group comprises some "borderline" combined iron preparations i.e.
preparations with an iron content of approximately 30 mg Fe2+ per defined
daily dose (DDD).
Historically:
For combinations of iron, vitamin B12 and folic acid (B03AE01), the
DDDs have been based on prophylaxis of iron deficiency anemia and
folic acid deficiency during pregnancy.
Various combinations, classified in B03AE10, contain very small
amounts of iron. The DDDs for these combinations have been based
on dose recommendations, and can be as low as corresponding to 30
mg Fe2+.
The DDDs for iron in other combinations have been based on
treatment of iron deficiency anemia, and correspond to a DDD of 0.2 g
Fe2+.
B03B VITAMIN B12 AND FOLIC ACID

B03BA Vitamin B12 (cyanocobalamin and analogues)
Hydroxocobalamin for treatment of neuralgia is classified here.
Combinations with liver extract are classified at separate 5th levels using
the corresponding 50-series. Combinations with folic acid are classified in
this group by using the 50-series.
Combinations indicated for symptomatic treatment of vitamin B12
deficiency are classified in B03BA51.
Vitamin B12, see also:
A11D - Vitamin B1, plain and in combination with vitamin B6 and B12
A11EA - Vitamin B-complex, plain
B03A - Iron preparations
The DDDs are based on maintenance treatment of pernicious anemia.
Different DDDs are assigned for oral and parenteral formulations of
cyanocobalamin due to great differences in bioavailability.
The DDD for mecobalamin is based on the treatment of peripheral
neuropathies.
B03BB Folic acid and derivatives

Folic acid and derivatives in combination with other substances are
classified in this group at separate 5th levels using the corresponding 50-
series, if folic acid deficiency is the main indication. Folinates, used as
87
antidotes, are classified in V03A. Combinations with iron, see B03AD and
B03AE. Folic acid for diagnostic use is classified in V04CX - Other
diagnostic agents.
Combinations with vitamin B12 are classified in B03BA.
The DDD for oral folic acid is based on prophylactic use and the
parenteral DDD is based on treatment.
B03X OTHER ANTIANEMIC PREPARATIONS

This group comprises antianemic preparations other than iron, vitamin B12
and folic acid.
B03XA Other antianemic preparations
The DDDs are based on the treatment of renal anemia in patients
maintained by -dialysis.
The DDD for luspatercept is based on the starting dose in the
treatment of myelodydplastic syndromes and beta-thalassaemia.
B05 BLOOD SUBSTITUTES AND PERFUSION SOLUTIONS

See also:
V07AB - Solvents and diluting agents, incl. irrigating solutions
V07AC - Blood transfusion, auxiliary products
No DDDs are established in this group. It is considered difficult to
establish DDDs, because of the great variations in dosages given.
B05A BLOOD AND RELATED PRODUCTS

B05AA Blood substitutes and plasma protein fractions
Polygeline is classified in B05AA06 gelatin agents.
ATC level B05AA07 hydroxyethylstarch includes starches that have been
etherified to varying extent e.g. hepta-, hexa-, penta,- and tetrastarches.
B05AX Other blood products
B05B I.V. SOLUTIONS

This group comprises i.v. solutions used in parenteral administration of
fluids, electrolytes and nutrients. I.v. solution additives (i.v. concentrates),
see B05X.
88
B05BA Solutions for parenteral nutrition
This group comprises amino acids, carbohydrates, fat emulsions etc. for
parenteral nutrition. Combinations with electrolytes are allowed.
Combinations of electrolytes and glucose are classified in B05BB -
Solutions affecting the electrolyte balance. These and similar
combinations are not primarily used as nutrients.
B05BB Solutions affecting the electrolyte balance
This group comprises electrolyte solutions, incl. combinations with e.g.
carbohydrates. Combinations with amino acids, fat etc. should be
classified in B05BA.
B05BC Solutions producing osmotic diuresis
B05C IRRIGATING SOLUTIONS

In this group products used for bladder irrigation, surgical irrigation, incl.
instruments etc. are classified. See also V07AB - Solvents and diluting
agents, incl. irrigating solutions.
Combined preparations are classified by using 5th level - 10. Only plain
preparations are classified at the other 5th levels.
B05CA Antiinfectives
B05CB Salt solutions
B05CX Other irrigating solutions
B05D PERITONEAL DIALYTICS

B05DA Isotonic solutions
B05DB Hypertonic solutions
B05X I.V. SOLUTION ADDITIVES

I.v. solution additives (i.v. concentrates) are concentrated preparations
containing substances used for correcting fluid and electrolyte balance
and nutritional status.
B05XA Electrolyte solutions
This group comprises plain electrolyte solutions, combinations of
electrolytes, and combinations of electrolytes and other substances (e.g.
trace elements). Products containing trace elements only are classified in
B05XA31.
89
B05XB Amino acids
B05XC Vitamins
See also A11 - Vitamins
B05XX Other i.v. solution additives
This group comprises all i.v. additives, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
B05Z HEMODIALYTICS AND HEMOFILTRATES

B05ZA Hemodialytics, concentrates
B05ZB Hemofiltrates
Hemofiltration solutions are classified in this group.
B06 OTHER HEMATOLOGICAL AGENTS

B06A OTHER HEMATOLOGICAL AGENTS
This group includes preparations for local and systemic use, and also some
preparations used for dissolving clots in catheters, hemodialysis clots etc.
See also:
V07A - All other non-therapeutic products
B01AB - Heparin group
B06AA Enzymes
This group comprises enzymes with fibrinolytic properties. Enzymes with
other well defined therapeutic use should be classified in the respective
groups, see e.g.:
A09A - Digestives, incl. enzymes
B01AD - Enzymes
D03BA - Proteolytic enzymes
S01KX - Other surgical aids
B06AB Heme products
Givosiran indicated for acute hepatic porphyria is classified in A16AX -
Various alimentary tract and metabolism products.
B06AC Drugs used in hereditary angioedema
The DDD for lanadelumab is based on the starting dose.
B06AX Other hematological agents

Glutamine for treatment of sickle cell disease is classified in A16AA03.
90
C CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
C01 CARDIAC THERAPY

A Cardiac glycosides
B Antiarrhythmics, class I and III
C Cardiac stimulants excl. cardiac glycosides
D Vasodilators used in cardiac diseases
E Other cardiac preparations
C02 ANTIHYPERTENSIVES
A Antiadrenergic agents, centrally acting
B Antiadrenergic agents, ganglion-blocking
C Antiadrenergic agents, peripherally acting
D Arteriolar smooth muscle, agents acting on
K Other antihypertensives
L Antihypertensives and diuretics in combination
N Combinations of antihypertensives in ATC-gr. C02
C03 DIURETICS
A Low-ceiling diuretics, thiazides
B Low-ceiling diuretics, excl. thiazides
C High-ceiling diuretics
D Aldosterone antagonists and other potassium-sparing agents
E Diuretics and potassium-sparing agents in combination
X Other diuretics
C04 PERIPHERAL VASODILATORS

A Peripheral vasodilators
C05 VASOPROTECTIVES
A Agents for treatment of hemorrhoids and anal fissures for topical use
B Antivaricose therapy
C Capillary stabilizing agents
91
C07 BETA BLOCKING AGENTS
A Beta blocking agents
B Beta blocking agents and thiazides
C Beta blocking agents and other diuretics
D Beta blocking agents, thiazides and other diuretics
E Beta blocking agents and vasodilators
F Beta blocking agents and other antihypertensives
C08 CALCIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS

C Selective calcium channel blockers with mainly vascular effects
D Selective calcium channel blockers with direct cardiac effects
E Non-selective calcium channel blockers
G Calcium channel blockers and diuretics
C09 AGENTS ACTING ON THE RENIN-ANGIOTENSIN SYSTEM

A ACE inhibitors, plain
B ACE inhibitors, combinations
C Angiotensin II receptor blockers (ARBs), plain
D Angiotensin II receptor blockers (ARBs), combinations
X Other agents acting on the renin-angiotensin system
C10 LIPID MODIFYING AGENTS

A Lipid modifying agents, plain
B Lipid modifying agents, combinations
92
C CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
This group comprises substances used for the treatment of cardiovascular
conditions.
Drugs used for the treatment of hypertension are classified in C02 –
Antihypertensives, C03 - Diuretics, C07 - Beta blocking agents, C08 -
Calcium channel blockers, and C09 - Agents acting on the renin-
angiotensin system. For the classification of combination products of
antihypertensives from different ATC groups, the following ranking should
be used, from higher to lower precedence: C09, C07, C08, , and C03.
C01 CARDIAC THERAPY
C01A CARDIAC GLYCOSIDES
This group comprises plain and combined preparations containing cardiac
glycosides, incl. standardized herbal extracts. Cardiac glycosides in
combination with substances in group C01D and C01E are classified in this
group. Combinations with antihypertensives, beta blocking agents,
calcium channel blockers and ACE inhibitors, see group C02, C07, C08 and
C09 respectively.
The DDDs are based on the average maintenance dose for the
treatment of cardiac failure. Exception: the DDD for deslanoside is for
acute treatment.
C01AA Digitalis glycosides

Combinations with diuretics are classified here.
C01AB Scilla glycosides
C01AC Strophanthus glycosides
C01AX Other cardiac glycosides
C01B ANTIARRHYTHMICS, CLASS I AND III

This group comprises preparations used in the treatment of arrhythmias.
The agents are listed according to the Vaughan Williams classification of
antiarrhythmics. The division of class I antiarrhythmics may vary,
depending on the literature used. The 3rd ed. of Avery's "Drug
Treatment" (1987) and "Drugs" 31, 93 - 95, 1986 are used as a basis for
the ATC classification. Class II antiarrhythmics see C07 and class IV, see
C08 (e.g. verapamil).
Adenosine, which is also used as an antiarrhythmic, is classified in C01EB.
93
Combined preparations are classified at separate 5th levels using the
corresponding 50-series. Combinations with psycholeptics are classified at
separate 5th levels using the corresponding 70-series. Combinations with
an antihypertensive e.g. reserpine are classified in C02AA.
The DDDs are based on the prophylaxis and treatment of
supraventricular and ventricular arrhythmias. The DDDs are based on
the maintenance dose. Preparations for parenteral administration are
only used initially and are therefore given the same DDD as oral
preparations.
C01BA Antiarrhythmics, class Ia

Combinations containing quinidine and verapamil are classified in C08DA.
C01BB Antiarrhythmics, class Ib
Lidocaine used as a local anesthetic is classified in N01BB. Phenytoin, a
class Ib antiarrhythmic, is classified as an antiepileptic in N03. Mexiletine
indicated for myotonic disorders is classified here.
C01BC Antiarrhythmics, class Ic
C01BD Antiarrhythmics, class III
Sotalol, which has class III antiarrhythmic properties, is classified in C07AA.
The DDD for ibutilide refer to ibutilide fumarate.
C01BG Other antiarrhythmics, class I and III
C01C CARDIAC STIMULANTS EXCL. CARDIAC GLYCOSIDES

This group comprises agents for the treatment of hypotension.
Respiratory stimulants are classified in R07AB.
Dihydroergotamine, which is used in the treatment of migraine as well as
hypotension, is classified in N02CA - Ergot alkaloids.
Combinations with peripheral vasodilators, see C04 - Peripheral
vasodilators.
This group includes various drugs used on different indications. The
DDDs are therefore established individually for each substance (i.e.
each ATC 5th level).
94
C01CA Adrenergic and dopaminergic agents
This group comprises sympathomimetics used in the treatment of
hypotension.
Etilefrin in combination with dihydroergotamine is classified in this group.
Oral products of ephedrine are classified in R03CA.
C01CE Phosphodiesterase inhibitors
Phosphodiesterase inhibitors such as theophylline, which are used in
asthma therapy, are classified in R03D.
C01CX Other cardiac stimulants
This group includes agents, which cannot be classified in the preceding
groups.
C01D VASODILATORS USED IN CARDIAC DISEASES

This group comprises preparations used in ischemic heart diseases. See
also C02 - Antihypertensives, C03 - Diuretics, C04 - Peripheral vasodilators,
C07 - Beta blocking agents, C08 - Calcium channel blockers and C09 -
Agents acting on the renin-angiotensin system.
Combinations with cardiac glycosides, see C01A.
Combinations with rauwolfia alkaloids, see C02AA.
Combinations with beta blocking agents, see C07.
Combinations with calcium channel blockers, see C08.
C01DA Organic nitrates
This group comprises nitrates used on the indication angina pectoris,
including transdermal preparations. Amyl nitrite is classified in V03AB -
Antidotes.
Combinations of isosorbide dinitrate and hydralazine are classified in
C01DA58.
All nitrate preparations in combination with psycholeptics are classified in
C01DA70. Nitrates in combination with psycholeptics and other agents
are also given the code C01DA70.
95
The DDDs for the nitrates are mainly based on the treatment of angina
pectoris attacks (3-4 times daily). The DDDs of preparations for oral
and transdermal administration are higher than the DDDs for other
routes of administration (e.g. sublingual) due to a lower bioavailability.
The DDDs for some preparations are mainly based on prophylaxis, for
instance the DDDs of isosorbide dinitrate and glyceryl trinitrate plaster.
No DDDs are established for parenteral preparations due to great
differences in the dosages used.
C01DB Quinolone vasodilators

C01DX Other vasodilators used in cardiac diseases
This group comprises vasodilators used in cardiac diseases, which cannot
be classified in the preceding groups.
C01E OTHER CARDIAC PREPARATIONS

This group comprises various preparations used in the treatment of
ischemic heart diseases, which cannot be classified in any of the preceding
groups.
C01EA Prostaglandins
This group comprises e.g. alprostadil. Specific formulations of alprostadil
for treatment of erectile dysfunction are classified in G04BE01.
The DDD for alprostadil equals the content of active substance in one
ampoule.
C01EB Other cardiac preparations

This group comprises plain products used in the treatment of ischemic
heart diseases, which cannot be classified in the preceding groups.
Adenosine, which is also used as an antiarrhythmic, is classified here.
Antiarrhythmics, see C01B.
Combinations of ivabradine and beta blocking agents are classified in
C07FX.
Other cardiovascular agents which cannot be classified in ATC group C02-
C09 are also classified here.
96
Products containing indometacin or ibuprofen, which are only used for
closing the ductus arteriosus in premature infants, are classified here.
Indometacin used as an antiinflammatory agent is classified in M01AB01
or S01BC01.
The DDD for ibuprofen is based on the course dose.
C01EX Other cardiac combination products

This group comprises combined preparations, which cannot be classified
in the preceding groups.
C02 ANTIHYPERTENSIVES
See also C03 - Diuretics, C07 - Beta blocking agents, C08 - Calcium channel
blockers and C09 - Agents acting on the renin-angiotensin system.
Antihypertensives are mainly classified at 3rd levels according to the
mechanism of action. Most headings are self-explanatory:
C02A Antiadrenergic agents, centrally acting
C02B Antiadrenergic agents, ganglion-blocking
C02C Antiadrenergic agents, peripherally acting
C02D Arteriolar smooth muscle, agents acting on
C02K Other antihypertensives
C02L Antihypertensives and diuretics in combination
C02N Combinations of antihypertensives in ATC gr. C02
The oral DDDs are based on the average doses needed to reduce the
blood pressure to a normal level in patients with mild-moderate
hypertension.
Parenteral DDDs are based on dosages used for the treatment of
hypertensive crises and are based on the content of the active
ingredient pr. vial (ampoule).
C02A ANTIADRENERGIC AGENTS, CENTRALLY ACTING

C02AA Rauwolfia alkaloids
This group comprises plain and combined rauwolfia preparations used in
hypertension.
There are separate 5th levels for combinations of rauwolfia alkaloids
(C02AA03) and for rauwolfia, whole root (C02AA04).
Combinations with beta blocking agents, see C07F - Beta blocking agents,
other combinations.
97
Combinations with diuretics, see C02LA - Rauwolfia alkaloids and diuretics
in combination.
Combinations with other antihypertensives, see C02N - Combinations of
antihypertensives.
Combined products are otherwise classified at separate 5th levels using
C02AB Methyldopa
Combinations with diuretics, see C02LB - Methyldopa and diuretics in
combination.
Combinations with Rauwolfia alkaloids and diuretics, see C02LA -
Rauwolfia alkaloids and diuretics in combination.
Different DDDs have been established for the various stereoiso-meric
forms of methyldopa, because of different potency.
C02AC Imidazoline receptor agonists

Clonidine and guanfacine also used in ADHD are classified in this group.
Low strength clonidine preparations used in the treatment of migraine are
classified in N02C - Antimigraine preparations.
Combinations with diuretics, see C02LC - Imidazoline receptor agonists in
combination with diuretics.
C02B ANTIADRENERGIC AGENTS, GANGLION-BLOCKING

C02BA Sulfonium derivatives
C02BB Secondary and tertiary amines
C02BC Bisquaternary ammonium compounds
C02C ANTIADRENERGIC AGENTS, PERIPHERALLY ACTING

Alpha- and beta-blocking agents, see C07AG.
C02CA Alpha-adrenoreceptor antagonists
Combinations with diuretics, see C02LE - Alpha-adrenoreceptor
antagonists and diuretics.
Alfuzosin and terazosin are classified in G04CA.
C02CC Guanidine derivatives
Combinations with diuretics, see C02LF - Guanidine derivatives and
diuretics.
98
C02D ARTERIOLAR SMOOTH MUSCLE, AGENTS ACTING ON
See also C08 - Calcium channel blockers.
C02DA Thiazide derivatives
Parenteral preparations of diazoxide are classified here.
Oral preparations containing diazoxide for treatment of hypoglycemia are
classified in V03AH.
C02DB Hydrazinophthalazine derivatives
Combinations with diuretics, see C02LG - Hydrazinophthalazine derivatives
and diuretics.
Combinations of isosorbide dinitrate and hydralazine are classified in
C01DA - Organic nitrates.
The oral DDD of dihydralazine is higher than the parenteral DDD. The
parenteral DDD is given as the chloride salt while the oral DDD is given
as the mesylate salt.
C02DC Pyrimidine derivatives

Minoxidil for systemic use is classified here.
Dermatological preparations containing minoxidil are classified in D11AX.
C02DD Nitroferricyanide derivatives
C02DG Guanidine derivatives
C02K OTHER ANTIHYPERTENSIVES

This group comprises all antihypertensives which cannot be classified in
groups C02A-D, C02L, C02N, C03 - Diuretics, C07 - Beta blocking agents,
C08 - Calcium channel blockers or C09 - Agents acting on the renin-
angiotensin system.
C02KA Alkaloids, excl. rauwolfia
C02KB Tyrosine hydroxylase inhibitors
C02KC MAO inhibitors
C02KD Serotonin antagonists
99
C02KX Antihypertensives for pulmonary arterial hypertension
All agents classified in this group are for treatment of pulmonary arterial
hypertension (PAH).
Other agents used for treatment of PAH such as phosphodiesterase
inhibitors (e.g. sildenafil) or prostaglandins (e.g. epoprostenol) are
classified in G04BE and in B01AC respectively.
The DDDs are based on treatment of pulmonary arterial hypertension.
C02L ANTIHYPERTENSIVES AND DIURETICS IN COMBINATION

All substances classified in groups C02A-K, in combination with diuretics
are classified in this group. At each 5th level, various combinations
containing e.g. different diuretics, other antihypertensives or potassium
may occur.
Combinations with beta blocking agents, see comments under C07.
Diuretics in combination with calcium channel blockers are classified in
C08.
Diuretics in combination with ACE inhibitors, are classified in C09BA.
Diuretics in combination with angiotensin II reseptor blockers (ARBs) are
classified in C09DA.
The need for a systematic approach to classify combinations of different
antihypertensives has resulted in a ranking according to the ATC codes.
Substances classified in ATC group C02AA take precedence over C02AB
and substances in C02A take precedence over C02B etc.
Example: A combined preparation containing bietaserpine, hydralazine
and hydrochlorothiazide will be given the code C02LA07 according to the
above mentioned ranking.
Combinations with psycholeptics are classified at separate 5th levels using
It has been considered most appropriate to assign fixed DDDs based on
the average use of the different combinations without considering and
comparing the strengths of the various components. 1 tablet is the
fixed DDD for products given once daily whereas the fixed DDD for
products given twice daily and three times daily is respectively
2 tablets and 3 tablets. The assigned DDDs cannot always be
compared with the DDDs assigned for plain preparations.
100
C02LA Rauwolfia alkaloids and diuretics in combination
C02LB Methyldopa and diuretics in combination
C02LC Imidazoline receptor agonists in combination with diuretics
C02LE Alpha-adrenoreceptor antagonists and diuretics
C02LF Guanidine derivatives and diuretics
C02LG Hydrazinophthalazine derivatives and diuretics
C02LK Alkaloids, excl. rauwolfia, in combination with diuretics
C02LL MAO inhibitors and diuretics
C02LN Serotonin antagonists and diuretics
C02LX Other antihypertensives and diuretics
C02N COMBINATIONS OF ANTIHYPERTENSIVES IN ATC-GR. C02

Comprises combinations of different antihypertensives classified in ATC-
gr. C02.
Antihypertensives in combination with diuretics are classified in C02L -
Antihypertensives and diuretics in combination.
Combinations with beta blocking agents, see C07F - Beta blocking agents,
other combinations.
The DDDs for fixed combinations are commented in C02L.
C03 DIURETICS
This group comprises diuretics, plain and in combination with potassium
or other agents. Vasopressin antagonists are also included in this group.
Potassium-sparing agents are classified in C03D and C03E.
Combinations with digitalis glycosides, see C01AA.
Combinations with antihypertensives, see C02L - Antihypertensives and
diuretics in combination.
Combinations with beta blocking agents, see C07B - C07D.
Combinations with calcium channel blockers, see C08.
Combinations with agents acting on the renin angiotensin system, see
C09B and C09D.
101
The DDDs for diuretics are based on monotherapy. Most diuretics are
used both for the treatment of edema and hypertension in similar
doses and the DDDs are therefore based on both indications.
The DDDs for combinations correspond to the DDD for the diuretic
component, except for ATC group C03E, see comments under this
level.
C03A LOW-CEILING DIURETICS, THIAZIDES

Combinations with potassium-sparing agents, see C03EA.
The different lipid solubility of the thiazides should be considered
when assigning DDDs.
C03AA Thiazides, plain

C03AB Thiazides and potassium in combination
The 5th levels correspond to those in C03AA:
C03AA01 - bendroflumethiazide
C03AB01 - bendroflumethiazide and potassium
C03AH Thiazides, combinations with psycholeptics and/or analgesics
C03AX Thiazides, combinations with other drugs
C03B LOW-CEILING DIURETICS, EXCL. THIAZIDES

This group comprises all low-ceiling diuretics not classified in C03A.
Combinations with potassium-sparing agents, see C03EA.
C03BA Sulfonamides, plain
C03BB Sulfonamides and potassium in combination
The 5th levels correspond to those in C03BA, see example in C03AB.
C03BC Mercurial diuretics
C03BD Xanthine derivatives
Includes e.g. theobromine. See also R03DA - Xanthines.
C03BK Sulfonamides, combinations with other drugs
Includes e.g. combination with psycholeptics.
102
C03BX Other low-ceiling diuretics
All low-ceiling diuretics which cannot be classified in the preceding groups
are classified here.
C03C HIGH-CEILING DIURETICS

This group comprises high-ceiling diuretics (loop-diuretics) e.g.
furosemide.
Combinations with potassium-sparing agents, see C03EB.
C03CA Sulfonamides, plain
C03CB Sulfonamides and potassium in combination
The 5th levels correspond to those in C03CA. See example in C03AB.
C03CC Aryloxyacetic acid derivatives
C03CD Pyrazolone derivatives
C03CX Other high-ceiling diuretics
All high-ceiling diuretics which cannot be classified in the preceding groups
C03D ALDOSTERONE ANTAGONISTS AND OTHER POTASSIUM-SPARING AGENTS

C03DA Aldosterone antagonists
Finerenone indicated for chronic kidney disease is classified in this group.
C03DB Other potassium-sparing agents
C03E DIURETICS AND POTASSIUM-SPARING AGENTS IN COMBINATION

Fixed DDDs are assigned for combinations in this group.
E.g. 1 tablet regardless of strengths is the DDD assigned for
hydrochlorothiazide and amiloride in combinations. See comments to
C02L also.
C03EA Low-ceiling diuretics and potassium-sparing agents

C03EB High-ceiling diuretics and potassium-sparing agents
C03X OTHER DIURETICS

C03XA Vasopressin antagonists
103
C04 PERIPHERAL VASODILATORS
C04A PERIPHERAL VASODILATORS
This group comprises plain and combined preparations used in the
treatment of cerebrovascular or peripheral circulatory disorders.
Combinations with Antihypertensives, see C02 - Antihypertensives.
Combinations with vasodilators used in cardiac diseases, see C01DA.
The DDDs are based on the doses used for the treatment of cerebral
and peripheral vascular disorders.
C04AA 2-amino-1-phenylethanol derivatives

C04AB Imidazoline derivatives
C04AC Nicotinic acid and derivatives
Includes low strength preparations (e.g. nicotinic acid tablets 50 mg).
Nicotinic acid preparations in high strength (e.g. nicotinic acid tablets 500
mg) is used as a cholesterol reducer and is classified in C10AD.
C04AD Purine derivatives
Combinations with nicotinic acid and derivatives are allowed at each 5th
level.
C04AE Ergot alkaloids
Includes combinations with other peripheral vasodilators.
Combinations with calcium channel blockers are classified in C08CA.
Combinations of cinnarizine and dihydroergcristine are classified in
N07CA52.
See also G02AB and N02CA.
C04AF Enzymes
C04AX Other peripheral vasodilators
Betahistine, cinnarizine and flunarizine are classified as antivertigo
preparations in N07CA.
Papaverine preparations, see A03AD and G04BE.
104
C05 VASOPROTECTIVES
No DDDs are established in this group, since most of the drugs in this
group are for topical use.
C05A AGENTS FOR TREATMENT OF HEMORRHOIDS AND ANAL FISSURES FOR

TOPICAL USE
This group comprises agents for local use, such as suppositories,
ointments etc. Preparations used for treatment of perineal trauma are
classified here.
C05AA Corticosteroids
All antihemorrhoidal products, which contain corticosteroids, are
classified in this group, including both plain products and combinations
with antiinfectives, local anesthetics etc. At each 5th plain level,
combinations may occur.
C05AB Antibiotics
All antihemorrhoidal products which contain antibiotics, excl.
combinations with corticosteroids, are classified in this group.
C05AD Local anesthetics
All antihemorrhoidal products which contain anesthetics, excl.
combinations with corticosteroids and/or antibiotics, are classified in this
group. At each 5th plain level, combinations may occur.
See also D04AB - Anesthetics for topical use and N01B - Local anesthetics.
C05AE Muscle relaxants
Topical products containing glyceryl trinitrate or isosorbide dinitrate are
C05AX Other agents for treatment of hemorrhoids and anal fissures for topical
use
Agents which cannot be classified in the preceding groups are classified in
this group, e.g. bismuth/zinc oxide-preparations.
C05B ANTIVARICOSE THERAPY

This group comprises all products for treatment of varices, i.v. infusion
induced thrombophlebitis etc.
Zinc bandages, see D09A - Medicated dressings.
105
C05BA Heparins or heparinoids for topical use
Heparin in combination with e.g. dexpanthenol and allantoin is classified
in C05BA53.
Heparin in combination with diclofenac for topical use is classified in
M02AA15.
Heparinoids in combination with calcium dobesilate are classified in
C05BX - Other sclerosing agents.
C05BB Sclerosing agents for local injection
C05BX Other sclerosing agents
Combinations of calcium dobesilate and heparinoids are classified here.
C05C CAPILLARY STABILIZING AGENTS

C05CA Bioflavonoids
Rutoside is classified in this group.
Oxerutines are classified in C05CA54.
Combinations with other capillary stabilizing agents are classified at
separate 5th levels using the corresponding 50-series.
C05CX Other capillary stabilizing agents
Lysine aescinate is classified in C05CX03.
C07 BETA BLOCKING AGENTS

C07A BETA BLOCKING AGENTS
All plain beta blocking agents are classified in this group.
Labetalol, and carvedilol are classified in C07AG - Alpha- and beta blocking
agents.
Beta blocking agents in combination with ACE inhibitors are classified in
C09BX - ACE inhibitors, other combinations.
Beta blocking agents in combination with ARBs are classified in C09DX -
Angiotensin II receptor blockers (ARBs), other combinations.
106
The DDDs are based on the treatment of mild-moderate hypertension.
The DDDs for oral and parenteral formulations are equal, even if the
parenteral preparations are used for the initial treatment of
arrhythmias. Exception: practolol.
C07AA Beta blocking agents, non-selective

All plain non-selective beta blocking agents are classified in this group.
C07AB Beta blocking agents, selective
All plain selective beta blocking agents are classified in this group.
The s-enantiomer and the racemate of atenolol are classified at separate
5th levels.
Different DDDs have been assigned for the two stereoisomeric forms
of atenolol due to different potency.
C07AG Alpha and beta blocking agents
C07B BETA BLOCKING AGENTS AND THIAZIDES

This group comprises combinations of beta blocking agents and thiazides.
Different thiazides may occur at each 5th level.
Combinations of beta blocking agents, thiazides and other agents are
classified at separate 5th levels using the 50-series.
See comments to C02L concerning the principles for assignment of
DDDs for the combined preparations.
C07BA Beta blocking agents, non-selective, and thiazides

C07BB Beta blocking agents, selective, and thiazides
C07BG Alpha and beta blocking agents and thiazides
C07C BETA BLOCKING AGENTS AND OTHER DIURETICS
This group comprises combinations of beta blocking agents and diuretics
excl. thiazides. Different diuretics except thiazides, may occur at each 5th
level.
Combinations with other agents in addition, are classified at separate 5th
levels using the 50-series.
DDDs for combined preparations.
107
C07CA Beta blocking agents, non-selective, and other diuretics
C07CB Beta blocking agents, selective, and other diuretics
C07CG Alpha and beta blocking agents and other diuretics
C07D BETA BLOCKING AGENTS, THIAZIDES AND OTHER DIURETICS

This group comprises combinations of beta blocking agents, thiazides and
other diuretics. Different thiazides and diuretics may occur at each 5th
level.
Combinations with other agents in addition, are classified at separate 5th
levels using the 50-series.
C07DA Beta blocking agents, non-selective, thiazides and other diuretics

C07DB Beta blocking agents, selective, thiazides and other diuretics
C07E BETA BLOCKING AGENTS AND VASODILATORS

This group comprises beta blocking agents and vasodilators (excl. calcium
channel blockers) in combination.
Combinations with calcium channel blockers are classified in C07F.
C07EA Beta blocking agents, non-selective, and vasodilators

C07EB Beta blocking agents, selective, and vasodilators
C07F BETA BLOCKING AGENTS, OTHER COMBINATIONS

Beta blocking agents in combination with ACE inhibitors are classified in
C09BX - ACE inhibitors, other combinations.
Beta blocking agents in combination with ARBs are classified in C09DX -
Angiotensin II receptor blockers (ARBs), other combinations.
C07FB Beta blocking agents and calcium channel blockers
108
C07FX Beta blocking agents, other combinations
Combinations of propranolol and hydralazine or dihydralazine are
classified in C07FX01.
C08 CALCIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS

The calcium channel blockers are classified according to selectivity of
calcium channel activity and direct cardiac effects. The ATC 4th levels are
subdivided according to chemical structure.
Combinations with ergot alkaloids (C04AE) are classified in this group by
using the 50-series.
Combinations with diuretics are classified in C08G.
Combinations with ACE inhibitors are classified in C09BB.
Combinations with beta blocking agents are classified in C07FB.
Combinations with statins are classified in C10BX.
The DDDs for calcium channel blockers are based on the treatment of
mild-moderate hypertension, although some are used for other
indications (e.g. angina pectoris).
The DDDs for oral and parenteral preparations are equal and are based
on the oral dose, since oral preparations represent the major fraction
of the total consumption.
C08C SELECTIVE CALCIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS WITH MAINLY VASCULAR

EFFECTS
C08CA Dihydropyridine derivatives
Preparations containing nifedipine in combination with ergot alkaloids are
classified in C08CA55.
Combinations with diuretics are classified in C08G.
Amlodipine in combination with atorvastatin is classified in C10BX03.
C08CX Other selective calcium channel blockers with mainly vascular effects
109
C08D SELECTIVE CALCIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS WITH DIRECT CARDIAC EFFECTS
C08DA Phenylalkylamine derivatives
Combinations containing verapamil and quinidine are classified in
C08DA51.
C08DB Benzothiazepine derivatives
C08E NON-SELECTIVE CALCIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS

C08EA Phenylalkylamine derivatives
C08EX Other non-selective calcium channel blockers
C08G CALCIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS AND DIURETICS

C08GA Calcium channel blockers and diuretics
C09 AGENTS ACTING ON THE RENIN-ANGIOTENSIN SYSTEM

The DDDs are based on the treatment of mild-moderate hypertension.
C09A ACE INHIBITORS, PLAIN

All plain ACE inhibitors are classified in this group. No separate ATC codes
are assigned for the active metabolites of the ACE inhibitors (e.g.
enalaprilat, quinaprilat).
Combinations with diuretics, see C09BA - ACE inhibitors and diuretics.
Combinations with calcium channel blockers, see C09BB - ACE inhibitors
and calcium channel blockers.
Combinations with beta blocking agents, see C09BX - ACE inhibitors, other
combinations.
C09AA ACE inhibitors, plain
C09B ACE INHIBITORS, COMBINATIONS

Combinations of ACE inhibitors, statins and acetylsalicylic acid are
classified in C10BX.
C09BA ACE inhibitors and diuretics
C09BB ACE inhibitors and calcium channel blockers
110
C09BX ACE inhibitors, other combinations
Combinations with beta blocking agents are classified in this group.
Combinations of ACE inhibitors, diuretics and calcium channel blockers are
also classified in this group.
C09C ANGIOTENSIN II RECEPTOR BLOCKERS (ARBs), PLAIN

C09CA Angiotensin II receptor blockers (ARBs), plain
C09D ANGIOTENSIN II RECEPTOR BLOCKERS (ARBs), COMBINATIONS

C09DA Angiotensin II receptor blockers (ARBs) and diuretics
C09DB Angiotensin II receptor blockers (ARBs) and calcium channel blockers
Combinations with hydrochlorothiazide are classified in C09DX.
C09DX Angiotensin II receptor blockers (ARBs), other combinations
C09X OTHER AGENTS ACTING ON THE RENIN-ANGIOTENSIN SYSTEM

C09XA Renin-inhibitors
Fixed combinations of aliskiren and valsartan are classified in C09DX.
C10 LIPID MODIFYING AGENTS

The DDDs are based on the treatment of hypercholesterolemia.
C10A LIPID MODIFYING AGENTS, PLAIN

Pantethine, which is also used in the treatment of hyperlipidemi, is
classified as a vitamin in A11HA.
C10AA HMG CoA reductase inhibitors
This group comprises agents which act as competitive inhibitors of 3-
hydroxy-3-methylglutaryl coenzyme A reductase (HMG CoA reductase).
Atorvastatin in combination with amlodipine is classified in C10BX03.
C10AB Fibrates
Clofibrate and analogues are classified here.
The DDD for fenofibrate is based on the micronised formulation.
111
C10AC Bile acid sequestrants
This group comprises substances (such as colestyramine and colestipol)
which reduces the cholesterol level by increasing the excretion of bile
acid.
C10AD Nicotinic acid and derivatives
This group comprises high strength preparations (e.g. nicotinic acid tab
500 mg) used as cholesterol reducers. Nicotinic acid or derivatives in low
strength preparations (e.g. nicotinic acid tab 50 mg) are classified in C04A -
Peripheral vasodilators.
Combinations of nicotinic acid and laropiprant are classified in C10AD52.
C10AX Other lipid modifying agents
This group comprises all cholesterol and triglyceride reducers, which
Icosapent ethyl is classified in C10AX06 - omega-3-triglycerides incl. other
esters and acids.
Sulodexide is classified in B01AB.
The DDD for evolocumab is based on dosing every second week.
The DDD for volanesorsen is based on the treatment of familial
chylomicronemia syndrome.
C10B LIPID MODIFYING AGENTS, COMBINATIONS

Fixed combinations of blood glucose-lowering drugs and lipid modifying
agents are classified in A10B.
For fixed combinations in C10B the DDD is based on dosing frequency
only. This implies that 1 UD (1 tablet) is the DDD for all products given
once daily and the DDD for products given twice daily and three times
daily is 2 UD (2 tablets) and 3 UD (3 tablets) respectively.
C10BA Combinations of various lipid modifying agents

C10BX Lipid modifying agents in combination with other drugs
This group comprises products which contain lipid modifying agents
(including combinations of various lipid modifying agents) in combination
with other substances.
Combinations with e.g. ACE inhibitors, angiotensin II antagonists, calcium
channel blockers or diuretics are classified in C10BX.
112
D DERMATOLOGICALS
D01 ANTIFUNGALS FOR DERMATOLOGICAL USE

A Antifungals for topical use
B Antifungals for systemic use
D02 EMOLLIENTS AND PROTECTIVES

A Emollients and protectives
B Protectives against UV-radiation
D03 PREPARATIONS FOR TREATMENT OF WOUNDS AND ULCERS

A Cicatrizants
B Enzymes
D04 ANTIPRURITICS, INCL. ANTIHISTAMINES, ANESTHETICS, ETC.

A Antipruritics, incl. antihistamines, anesthetics, etc.
D05 ANTIPSORIATICS
A Antipsoriatics for topical use
B Antipsoriatics for systemic use
D06 ANTIBIOTICS AND CHEMOTHERAPEUTICS FOR DERMATOLOGICAL USE

A Antibiotics for topical use
B Chemotherapeutics for topical use
C Antibiotics and chemotherapeutics, combinations
D07 CORTICOSTEROIDS, DERMATOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS

A Corticosteroids, plain
B Corticosteroids, combinations with antiseptics
C Corticosteroids, combinations with antibiotics
X Corticosteroids, other combinations
D08 ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS

A Antiseptics and disinfectants
D09 MEDICATED DRESSINGS

A Medicated dressings
113
D10 ANTI-ACNE PREPARATIONS
A Anti-acne preparations for topical use
B Anti-acne preparations for systemic use
D11 OTHER DERMATOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS

A Other dermatological preparations
114
D DERMATOLOGICALS
Most of the drugs in this group are preparations for topical use. Some few
preparations for systemic use with clear dermatological applications, e.g.
griseofulvin (antimycotic), retinoids (for treatment of acne) and psoralens
and retinoids (for treatment of psoriasis) are classified in this group.
Only oral preparations in ATC group D are given DDDs. Most products
in this group are for topical use, and no DDDs are assigned because the
amount given per day can vary very much according to the intensity
and distribution of the disease. Consumption figures for these
dermatological preparations can be expressed in grams of preparations
regardless of strength.
D01 ANTIFUNGALS FOR DERMATOLOGICAL USE

This group comprises preparations for topical and systemic treatment of
dermatological mycoses. Preparations with systemic antimycotic effect,
see also J02A - Antimycotics for systemic use.
Topical preparations used especially in gynecological infections are
classified in G01A - Antiinfectives and antiseptics, excl. combinations with
corticosteroids or G01B - Antiinfectives/antiseptics in combination with
corticosteroids. Preparations for local treatment of fungal infections in the
mouth, see A01AB - Antiinfectives and antiseptics for local oral treatment.
D01A ANTIFUNGALS FOR TOPICAL USE

Combined preparations are classified in this group if mycosis is the main
indication.
D01AA Antibiotics
Preparations used in the treatment of bacterial dermatological infections,
see D06A - Antibiotics for topical use.
D01AC Imidazole and triazole derivatives
Shampoos containing imidazoles are classified here. Topical
metronidazole is mainly used in rosacea and is classified in D06BX - Other
chemotherapeutics.
Combinations with corticosteroids are classified in D01AC20. All other
combinations are classified by using the 50-series e.g. miconazole and
zinc.
115
Combinations of imidazole and triazole derivatives, gentamicin and
corticosteroids are classified in D07C - Corticosteroids, combinations with
antibiotics.
D01AE Other antifungals for topical use
See also D08AH - Quinoline derivatives
Combined preparations containing salicylic acid, which are used as
antifungals (e.g. dusting powders), are classified in this group in D01AE20.
See also D02AF - Salicylic acid preparations.
Derivatives of undecylenic acid are classified in D01AE04.
D01B ANTIFUNGALS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

This group comprises preparations used in the systemic treatment of
dermatological mycoses. See also J02A - Antimycotics for systemic use.
D01BA Antifungals for systemic use
The DDDs for griseofulvin and terbinafine are based on the treatment
of dermatophyte infections in skin, hair or nails.
D02 EMOLLIENTS AND PROTECTIVES

D02A EMOLLIENTS AND PROTECTIVES
This group comprises all types of emollients and protectives with no
specific therapeutic effect or use, and also preparations for use in wounds,
which are not classified in D09 - Medicated dressings.
Some similar products are classified in D03A - Cicatrizants, e.g. cod-liver oil
ointments.
D02AA Silicone products
D02AB Zinc products
D02AC Soft paraffin and fat products
Some similar products with a higher water content (creams) are classified
in D02AX - Other emollients and protectives. Soft paraffin dressings, see
D09AX.
D02AD Liquid plasters
Liquid plasters are classified in this group whereas non-medicated
adhesive plasters, surgical tapes etc. are classified in V07AA.
116
D02AE Carbamide products
D02AF Salicylic acid preparations
Preparations containing salicylic acid used for the treatment of mycosis
are classified in D01AE - Other antifungals for topical use.
Salicylic acid in combination with corticosteroids, see D07X.
Medicated shampoos containing salicylic acid are classified in
D11AC30 - others.
Topical products for joint and muscular pain containing combinations with
salicylic acid are classified in M02AC.
All other preparations containing salicylic acid, including anti-acne
preparations, should be classified in this group.
D02AX Other emollients and protectives
Soft paraffin and fat products with high water content (creams) are
classified in this group. See also D02AC - Soft paraffin and fat products.
Weak boric acid vaseline is classified here.
Other boric acid products are classified in D08AD.
D02B PROTECTIVES AGAINST UV-RADIATION

This group comprises special protectives against UV-radiation.
D02BA Protectives against UV-radiation for topical use
Derivatives may by included in each plain 5th level.
D02BB Protectives against UV-radiation for systemic use
The DDD of betacarotene is based on the treatment of patients with
erythropoietic protoporphyria.
D03 PREPARATIONS FOR TREATMENT OF WOUNDS AND ULCERS

Topical preparations used in the treatment of wounds and ulcers, e.g. leg
ulcers, are classified in this group. Protective ointments are classified in
D02A - Emollients and protectives.
See also
D06 - Antibiotic and chemotherapeutics for dermatological use.
D08 - Antiseptics and disinfectants.
D09 - Medicated dressings.
117
D03A CICATRIZANTS
Topical vitamin preparations etc. are classified in this group if they cannot
be classified in other groups.
D03AA Cod-liver oil ointments
Includes cod-liver (vitamin A) ointments in combination with
chlorhexidine.
D03AX Other cicatrizants
Includes e.g. dextranomer powders with or without antiseptics. See also
D09A - Medicated dressings.
Medicated dressings containing hyaluronic acid are classified here.
Topical products containing glyceryl trinitrate or isosorbide dinitrate used
for treatment of anal fissures are classified in C05AE.
D03B ENZYMES
Proteolytic enzymes for topical treatment of ulcers are classified here.
D03BA Proteolytic enzymes
D04 ANTIPRURITICS, INCL. ANTIHISTAMINES, ANESTHETICS, ETC.

D04A ANTIPRURITICS, INCL. ANTIHISTAMINES, ANESTHETICS, ETC.
This group comprises antipruritics for topical use in the treatment of
pruritus, minor burns, insect stings, herpes zoster etc.
See also D07 - Corticosteroids, dermatological preparations.
D04AA Antihistamines for topical use
At each 5th level, antiseptics, siccants etc. may occur in combination with
the antihistamines. Combinations with corticosteroids, see
D07 - Corticosteroids, dermatological preparations.
Combinations with anesthetics are classified in D04AB.
Combinations of diphenhydramine and diethyltoluamid are classified at
the plain level for diphenhydramine in D04AA.
118
D04AB Anesthetics for topical use
At each 5th plain level, antiseptics, siccants etc. may occur in combination
with the anesthetics. Combinations with corticosteroids, see D07 -
Corticosteroids, dermatological preparations.
Combinations with antihistamines are classified in D04AB at the
corresponding plain 5th level.
See also C05A - Agents for treatment of hemorrhoids and anal fissures for
topical use, and N01B - Anesthetics, local.
D04AX Other antipruritics
This group comprises ointments, creams, liniments etc. containing e.g.
camphora, menthol, calamine. Crotamiton is classified here. When
classifying products in this group, alternative groups should be considered,
e.g.:
D02 - Emollients and protectives
D08 - Antiseptics and disinfectants
M02 - Topical products for joint and muscular pain
Nalfurafine and difelikefalin indicated for pruritus in chronic kidney
disease are classified in V03AX Other therapeutic products.
D05 ANTIPSORIATICS
D05A ANTIPSORIATICS FOR TOPICAL USE
This group comprises products for topical use mainly for the treatment of
psoriasis. Corticosteroids for topical use are classified in
D07 - Corticosteroids, dermatological preparations.
D05AA Tars
All tar preparations for dermatological use are classified in this group,
except for combinations with corticosteroids.
D05AC Antracen derivatives
D05AD Psoralens for topical use
D05AX Other antipsoriatics for topical use
Corticosteroids in combination with vitamin D analogues indicated only for
the treatment of psoriasis are classified in D05AX.
119
D05B ANTIPSORIATICS FOR SYSTEMIC USE
This group comprises drugs for systemic use against psoriasis.
Antineoplastic agents, sometimes used in severe psoriasis, are classified in
group L - Antineoplastic and immunomodulating agents.
Agents with immunosuppressant properties indicated for treatment of
psoriasis are classified in L04 - Immunosuppressants.
D05BA Psoralens for systemic use
Methoxsalen used in extracorporeal photopheresis systems is also
classified here.
The DDDs for psoralens for systemic use are based on the combined
treatment with drug and UV-A irradiation.
D05BB Retinoids for treatment of psoriasis

Retinoids for the treatment of acne are classified in D10BA.
Alitretinoin used for hand eczema is classified in D11A.
D05BX Other antipsoriatics for systemic use
Alefacept and efalizumab are classified in L04AA.
Dimethyl fumarate indicated for plaque psoriasis or multiple sclerosis is
classified in L04AX.
D06 ANTIBIOTICS AND CHEMOTHERAPEUTICS FOR DERMATOLOGICAL USE

This group comprises products for topical use in skin infections etc.
Antimicrobial chemotherapeutics are classified here, while antineoplastic
chemotherapeutics are classified in L01.
D06A ANTIBIOTICS FOR TOPICAL USE

This group comprises antibiotics for dermatological use, except
Antibiotics with antimycotic properties - D01A
Combinations with chemotherapeutics - D06C
Combinations with corticosteroids - D07C
Antiinfectives for treatment of acne - D10AF
120
D06AA Tetracycline and derivatives
Combined preparations, which contain oxytetracycline and other
antibiotics, are classified in D06AA03 - oxytetracycline.
D06AX Other antibiotics for topical use
Combined preparations which contain neomycin and other antibiotics
(e.g. bacitracin) are classified in D06AX04 - neomycin. Combinations with
local anesthetics are also included in this code.
Combined preparations containing bacitracin and chlorhexidine or
polymyxin B are classified in D06AX05 - bacitracin.
D06B CHEMOTHERAPEUTICS FOR TOPICAL USE
This group includes antimicrobial chemotherapeutics for dermatological
use, except:
Combinations with antibiotics - D06C
Combinations with corticosteroids - D07C
Antineoplastic chemotherapeutics are classified in L01 - Antineoplastic
agents.
D06BA Sulfonamides
D06BB Antivirals
This group includes both direct acting antivirals and other agents for viral
diseases.
Mucoadhesive formulations of aciclovir are classified in J05AB01.
Podophyllin preparations are classified at the 5th level for
podophyllotoxin.
D06BX Other chemotherapeutics
This group comprises chemotherapeutics used in different skin disorders,
which cannot be classified in the preceding groups, e.g. metronidazole for
the treatment of rosacea.
Some agents used in the treatment of actinic keratosis are also classified
here. Other agents used in this indication are classified in
D06BB - Antivirals, D11AX - Other dermatologicals, L01BC - Pyrimidine
analogues and L01XD - Sensitizers in photo-/radiotherapy.
121
D06C ANTIBIOTICS AND CHEMOTHERAPEUTICS, COMBINATIONS
D07 CORTICOSTEROIDS, DERMATOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS

As a main rule, all topical corticosteroid preparations should be classified
in this group. There are, however, some few exceptions:
Combinations of corticosteroids and antiinfectives for gynaecological use,
see G01B.
Corticosteroids for local oral treatment, see A01AC.
Corticosteroids in combination with antifungals are classified in D01A.
Anti-acne preparations, see D10A.
Antihemorrhoidals with corticosteroids, see C05AA.
Corticosteroids for ophthalmological or otological use, see S - Sensory
organs.
D07A CORTICOSTEROIDS, PLAIN

The group is subdivided according to clinical potency of the steroids as
such. Additional agents meant to enhance the penetration and increase
the potency of the product do not influence the classification, neither do
the strength of the preparations or the vehicle.
D07AA Corticosteroids, weak (group I)
D07AB Corticosteroids, moderately potent (group II)
D07AC Corticosteroids, potent (group III)
D07AD Corticosteroids, very potent (group IV)
D07B CORTICOSTEROIDS, COMBINATIONS WITH ANTISEPTICS

This group comprises combined corticosteroid/antiseptic preparations for
dermatological use.
Antifungal preparations with corticosteroids are classified in
D01A - Antifungals for topical use. Corticosteroids, antiseptics and salicylic
acid in combination are classified in D07X.
The group is subdivided according to clinical potency, see D07A.
Exceptions, see D07. At each 5th level various antiseptics may occur.
D07BA Corticosteroids, weak, combinations with antiseptics
122
D07BB Corticosteroids, moderately potent, combinations with antiseptics
D07BC Corticosteroids, potent, combinations with antiseptics
D07BD Corticosteroids, very potent, combinations with antiseptics
D07C CORTICOSTEROIDS, COMBINATIONS WITH ANTIBIOTICS

This group comprises combined corticosteroid/antibiotic preparations for
dermatological use. The group is subdivided according to clinical potency,
see D07A. Exceptions, see D07.
At each 5th level various antibiotics may occur.
Combinations of corticosteroids, gentamicin and imidazole and triazole
derivatives are classified here. Combinations of corticosteroids and
imidazole and triazole derivatives are classified in D01AC - Imidazole and
triazole derivatives.
D07CA Corticosteroids, weak, combinations with antibiotics
D07CB Corticosteroids, moderately potent, combinations with antibiotics
D07CC Corticosteroids, potent, combinations with antibiotics
D07CD Corticosteroids, very potent, combinations with antibiotics
D07X CORTICOSTEROIDS, OTHER COMBINATIONS

This group comprises most other combined corticosteroid preparations for
dermatological use, e.g. combinations with coal tar, carbamide and
salicylic acid. Salicylic acid is regarded as a keratolytic agent.
Preparations with salicylic acid and antiseptics are classified in this group,
as salicylic acid is regarded as being more important than the antiseptics
for the therapeutic use of these products (psoriasis, seborrhea).
The group is subdivided according to clinical potency, see D07A.
Exceptions, see D07.
Corticosteroids in combination with antifungals are classified in D01A.
D07XA Corticosteroids, weak, other combinations
D07XB Corticosteroids, moderately potent, other combinations
D07XC Corticosteroids, potent, other combinations
D07XD Corticosteroids, very potent, other combinations
123
D08 ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS
D08A ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS
This group comprises all dermatological antiinfective preparations, which
are not classified in any of the following groups:
D01 - Antifungals for dermatological use
D03A - Cicatrizants
D06 - Antibiotics and chemotherapeutics for dermatological use
D07B - Corticosteroids, combinations with antiseptics
D07X - Corticosteroids, other combinations
D09A - Medicated dressings
D10A - Anti-acne preparations for topical use
D11AC - Medicated shampoos
P03A - Ectoparasiticides, incl. scabicides
Antiviral agents, see D06BB.
Non-therapeutic auxiliary products, such as exploration creams and
lubricants, are classified in V07AY. Lubricants, which contain antiseptics,
are, however, classified in this group.
The group is subdivided according to chemical structure.
At each 5th plain level combinations with alcohols are allowed.
D08AA Acridine derivatives
D08AB Aluminium agents
Combinations with quarternary ammonium compounds are classified in
D08AJ.
D08AC Biguanides and amidines
D08AD Boric acid products
Weak boric acid vaseline is classified in D02AX.
D08AE Phenol and derivatives
Each 5th level also allows combinations with alcohol.
D08AF Nitrofuran derivatives
D08AG Iodine products
See also D03AX and D09AA. Cadexomer iodine is classified in D03AX.
Medicated dressings containing iodine are classified in D09AA.
124
D08AH Quinoline derivatives
Chloroquinaldol and clioquinol are classified in this group and not in
D01 - Antifungals for dermatological use.
Chloroquinaldol and clioquinol for systemic use are classified in
P01AA - Hydroxyquinoline derivatives.
D08AJ Quaternary ammonium compounds
Combinations with aluminium agents are classified here.
D08AK Mercurial products
Combined products, which also contain silver compounds, are classified in
this group.
D08AL Silver compounds
Combined products, which also contain mercury compounds, see D08AK.
D08AX Other antiseptics and disinfectants
Hydrogenperoxide ≥ 40% solutions used in the treatment of seborrheic
keratosis or warts are classified in D11AX.
D09 MEDICATED DRESSINGS

D09A MEDICATED DRESSINGS
This group comprises medicated dressings, ointment dressings etc. Liquid
wound protectives are classified in D02AD - Liquid plasters. Local
hemostatics, e.g. gauze, tampons etc. are classified in B02BC - Local
hemostatics. Medicated dressings containing hyaluronic acid are classified
in D03AX - Other cicatrizants.
D09AA Medicated dressings with antiinfectives
See also D03AX and D08AG. Products containing cadexomer iodine are
classified in D03AX.
D09AB Zinc bandages
Zinc bandages with or without supplements are classified in this group.
D09AX Soft paraffin dressings
Dressings with antiinfectives, see D09AA.
Dressings with scarlet red are classified in this group.
125
D10 ANTI-ACNE PREPARATIONS
The DDDs are based on the treatment of severe acne.
D10A ANTI-ACNE PREPARATIONS FOR TOPICAL USE

This group comprises all topical preparations used specifically in the
treatment of acne, incl. preparations with antibiotics, corticosteroids etc.
D10AA Corticosteroids, combinations for treatment of acne
Only combined corticosteroid preparations specifically used in the
treatment of acne are classified in this group. Other dermatological
corticosteroid preparations are classified in D07 - Corticosteroids,
dermatological preparations.
Combinations with retinoids are classified in D10AD.
Combinations with peroxides are classified in D10AE.
D10AB Preparations containing sulfur
Preparations, which contain sulfur in addition to a sulfur derivative, should
be classified at the 5th level of the derivative.
The products may contain other active ingredients such as resorcinol.
D10AD Retinoids for topical use in acne
All retinoids for topical use are classified in D10AD, including
combinations with antibacterials.
D10AE Peroxides
Combinations with antiinfectives are classified in D10AF.
D10AF Antiinfectives for treatment of acne
This group comprises mainly antibiotics for topical use with acne as the
main indication. Minocycline also indicated for the treatment of rosacea is
Topical antiinfectives with other main indications are classified in D06 -
Antibiotics and chemotherapeutics for dermatological use.
Combinations with retinoids are classified in D10AD.
D10AX Other anti-acne preparations for topical use
126
D10B ANTI-ACNE PREPARATIONS FOR SYSTEMIC USE
This group comprises drugs for systemic use in the treatment of acne.
Antibiotics, such as tetracyclines and erythromycin, which are also used
for the treatment of acne, are classified in group J.
Combinations of e.g. estrogen and antiandrogen, used for the treatment
of acne, are classified in group G03 - Sex hormones and modulators of the
genital system.
D10BA Retinoids for treatment of acne
Retinoids used in severe psoriasis are classified in D05BB, whereas
alitretinoin used for hand eczema is classified in D11A.
D10BX Other anti-acne preparations for systemic use
Ichtasol preparations for systemic use in treatment of acne are classified
in this group.
D11 OTHER DERMATOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS

D11A OTHER DERMATOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS
This group comprises various dermatological preparations, which cannot
Insect repellents are classified in P03B - Insecticides and repellents.
D11AA Antihidrotics
Glycopyrronium for topical use is classified here. Glycopyrronium bromide
for systemic use is classified in A03AB
D11AC Medicated shampoos
Shampoos containing imidazoles are classified in D01AC.
Shampoos containing coal tar are classified in D05AA.
D11AE Androgens for topical use
D11AF Wart and anti-corn preparations
Preparations such as keratolytics for the treatment of common warts and
cornified lesions are classified in this group.
Podophyllotoxin/podophyllin e.g. for the treatment of genital warts, is
classified in D06BB.
Hydrogenperoxide ≥40% solutions used in the treatment of seborrheic
keratosis or warts are classified in D11AX.
127
D11AH Agents for dermatitis, excluding corticosteroids
This group includes agents used for atopic dermatitis or eczema.
Corticosteroides, see D07.
D11AX Other dermatologicals
This group comprises products, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups. E.g. minoxidil for the treatment of male pattern
baldness is classified here.
Lithium succinate in combination with other substances, e. g. zinc sulphate
is classified in D11AX04 - lithium succinate.
Diclofenac formulated as a 3% hyaluronic acid gel used in treatment of
actinic keratoses is classified here.
Hydrogenperoxide ≥40% solutions used in the treatment of seborrheic
keratosis or warts are classified here, while low strength solutions are
classified in D08AX.
128
G GENITO URINARY SYSTEM AND SEX HORMONES
G01 GYNECOLOGICAL ANTIINFECTIVES AND ANTISEPTICS

A Antiinfectives and antiseptics, excl. combinations with corticosteroids
B Antiinfectives/antiseptics in combination with corticosteroids
G02 OTHER GYNECOLOGICALS

A Uterotonics
B Contraceptives for topical use
C Other gynecologicals
G03 SEX HORMONES AND MODULATORS OF THE GENITAL SYSTEM

A Hormonal contraceptives for systemic use
B Androgens
C Estrogens
D Progestogens
E Androgens and female sex hormones in combination
F Progestogens and estrogens in combination
G Gonadotropins and other ovulation stimulants
H Antiandrogens
X Other sex hormones and modulators of the genital system
G04 UROLOGICALS
B Urologicals
C Drugs used in benign prostatic hypertrophy
129
G GENITO URINARY SYSTEM AND SEX HORMONES
G01 GYNECOLOGICAL ANTIINFECTIVES AND ANTISEPTICS
This group comprises gynecological antiinfectives and antiseptics mainly
for local use. See also:
J - Antiinfectives for systemic use
D06 - Antibiotics and chemotherapeutics for dermatological use
P01AB - Nitroimidazole derivatives
The DDDs are based on the treatment of vaginal infections.
G01A ANTIINFECTIVES AND ANTISEPTICS, EXCL. COMBINATIONS WITH

CORTICOSTEROIDS
This group comprises preparations, mainly for local use.
Combinations with corticosteroids, see G01B.
Antivirals for topical use, including gynecological use, such as
podophyllotoxin, are classified in D06 - Antibiotics and chemotherapeutics
for dermatological use.
G01AA Antibiotics
Nystatin in combination with nifuratel is classified in G01AA51.
G01AB Arsenic compounds
G01AC Quinoline derivatives
G01AD Organic acids
G01AE Sulfonamides
Combinations of different sulfonamides are given the code G01AE10.
G01AF Imidazole derivatives
Imidazole derivatives (e.g. metronidazole and ornidazole) in formulations
for vaginal administration are classified in this group. Parenteral
formulations are classified in J01XD, as they are mainly used in anaerobic
infections. Imidazole derivatives in oral (including tablets used for the
treatment of gynecological infections only) and rectal dosage forms are
classified in P01AB. Metronidazole for topical use in skin disorders is
classified in D06BX - Other chemotherapeutics.
The combination of econazole and benzydamine is classified in G01AF55.
130
G01AG Triazole derivatives
Fluconazole tablets in single dose packages, only for gynecological
infections, are classified together with other packages for systemic use in
J02A - Antimycotics for systemic use.
G01AX Other antiinfectives and antiseptics
Nifuratel in combination with nystatin is classified in G01AA51.
Vaginal ring with dapiravine for risk reduction of HIV-1 infection is
classified here.
G01B ANTIINFECTIVES/ANTISEPTICS IN COMBINATION WITH CORTICOSTEROIDS

All antiinfectives/antiseptics for gynecological use, which contain
corticosteroids, are classified in this group.
G01BA Antibiotics and corticosteroids
G01BC Quinoline derivatives and corticosteroids
G01BD Antiseptics and corticosteroids
G01BE Sulfonamides and corticosteroids
G01BF Imidazole derivatives and corticosteroids
G02 OTHER GYNECOLOGICALS

Analgesics used in dysmenorrhea, see N02B - Other analgesics and
antipyretics and M01A - Antiinflammatory and antirheumatic products,
non-steroids.
G02A UTEROTONICS
Plain preparations of oxytocin and analogues are classified in H01B -
Posterior pituitary lobe hormones.
G02AB Ergot alkaloids
This group comprises ergot alkaloids, e.g. methylergometrine, used for
stimulation of uterine contractions. Other ergot alkaloids are classified in
C04A - Peripheral vasodilators, and in N02C - Anti-migraine preparations.
The DDDs are based on use in delivery.
G02AC Ergot alkaloids and oxytocin incl. analogues, in combination
131
G02AD Prostaglandins
Misoprostol low strength tablets (25 mcg) used for induction of labour are
classified here. Misoprostol tablets used for peptic ulcer are classified in
A02BB.
G02AX Other uterotonics
This group comprises uterotonics, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
G02B CONTRACEPTIVES FOR TOPICAL USE

Contraceptives for systemic use, see G03A.
G02BA Intrauterine contraceptives
IUDs (intrauterine devices) are classified in this group. IUDs containing
progestogens are also classified in this group.
G02BB Intravaginal contraceptives
Pessaries, vaginal foams etc. are classified in this group.
Intravaginal devices containing hormones are also classified in this group.
The DDDs for combined devices containing estrogen and progestogen
are based on use in menstrual cycles of 28 days. Thus the DDD is
0.0357 UD (1 UD = 1 device).
G02C OTHER GYNECOLOGICALS

G02CA Sympathomimetics, labour repressants
This group includes sympathomimetics used to repress labour. Similar
adrenergic drugs, which are mainly used in the treatment of asthma, are
classified in R03C.
Fenoterol infusion only intended for repressing preterm labour is classified
in this group, while other systemic formulations of fenoterol are classified
in R03CC04.
The DDDs are based on use as labour repressants.
G02CB Prolactine inhibitors

Cabergoline and bromocriptine low dose tablets are classified in this
group. Cabergoline and bromocriptine tablets in higher strengths are
classified in N04 - Anti-Parkinson drugs.
132
Lisuride tablets in high strength (0.2 mg) are classified in this group, while
low strength tablets (25 mcg) are classified in N02C -Antimigraine
preparations.
The DDDs are based on use as lactation inhibitors. The DDD for
parenteral depot formulations of bromocriptine is equal to the DDD for
oral administration, based on the assumption that the single dose
parenteral treatment equals 14 days of oral treatment.
G02CC Antiinflammatory products for vaginal administration

This group comprises e.g. non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs for vaginal
administration.
Combinations of econazole and benzydamine is classified in G01AF55 -
econazole, combinations.
G02CX Other gynecologicals
G03 SEX HORMONES AND MODULATORS OF THE GENITAL SYSTEM

Other hormones, see H - Systemic hormonal preparations, excl. sex
hormones and insulins.
Sex hormones used only in the treatment of neoplastic diseases (often
selected strengths) are classified in L - Antineoplastic and
immunomodulating agents.
The DDDs of many of the hormone preparations may vary considerably
with the route of administration due to substantial differences in
bioavailability. The DDDs of depot preparations are calculated as the
dose divided by the dosing interval.
G03A HORMONAL CONTRACEPTIVES FOR SYSTEMIC USE

This group comprises hormonal preparations, which are used as
contraceptives. Similar hormonal preparations, which are used for the
treatment of e.g. menopausal symptoms and menstrual irregularities, are
classified in G03F.
Combinations of cyproterone and estrogen also used as contraceptives
are, however, classified in G03HB.
Intravaginal and intrauterine devices containing hormones are classified in
G02B.
Transdermal patches for contraception are classified here.
133
The DDDs are based on use as contraceptives.
The DDDs of combined preparations of estrogen and progestogen and
plain progestogen products are based on use in menstrual cycles of 28
days. Thus, the DDD is 0.75 and 1 UD for 21 and 28 tablets cycle
package, respectively. The same principle is used for transdermal
patches.
For the 24 tablets cycle packages the DDD is based on continuous use
for 120 days and a 4-days tablet free interval. Thus, the DDD is 0.967
UD.
The DDDs for preparations only used in postcoital contraception are
based on the course dose.
G03AA Progestogens and estrogens, fixed combinations

This group comprises preparations, which contain fixed combinations of
progestogen and estrogens.
The preparations are classified at 5th levels according to the progestogen.
Products containing mestranol (a prodrug of ethinylestradiol) are
classified together with ethinylestradiol.
G03AB Progestogens and estrogens, sequential preparations
This group comprises preparations with varying contents of progestogens
and estrogens adjusted to the normal hormonal cycle. A package which is
intended for one cycle, may contain e.g. three types of tablets, each
designed to cover a special part of the menstrual period. Cycle packages
may contain some tablets with progestogen only.
5th levels are built up as in G03AA.
G03AC Progestogens
This group includes hormonal contraceptives, which contain progestogens
only.
G03AD Emergency contraceptives
Levonorgestrel products (packages) indicated only for emergency
contraception are classified in G03AD01.
134
G03B ANDROGENS
Anabolic steroids, see A14A. Norethandrolone, which has both anabolic
and androgenic effects, is classified in A14A since the anabolic effect is
considered to be the most important effect.
This group comprises male sex hormones. Combined preparations are
included in this group, except combinations with female sex hormones,
which are classified in G03E - Androgens and female sex hormones in
combination.
The DDDs are based on use in substitution therapy in male hypo-
gonadism. The DDDs for patches (e.g. testosterone) are given in
amount delivered.
G03BA 3-oxoandrosten (4) derivatives

The DDD for parenteral and oral testosterone is expressed as declared
amount of ester. The DDD for TD and SL route of administration is
expressed as declared amount of testosterone.
G03BB 5-androstanon (3) derivatives
G03C ESTROGENS
This group comprises estrogens and combinations, except combinations
with
- androgens, see G03E
- progestogens, see G03F
- antiandrogens, see G03HB
Hormonal contraceptives, see G03A.
Estrogens used only in neoplastic diseases, see L - Antineoplastic and
The DDDs are based on systemic use in postmenopausal estrogen
substitution therapy and in the treatment of premenstrual ailments.
However, for some preparations for vaginal administration the DDDs
are based on local treatment.
The DDDs for transdermal preparations are based on the amount of
active ingredient delivered per 24 hours and the number of days each
patch is used.
135
G03CA Natural and semisynthetic estrogens, plain
This group comprises preparations, which contain one or more natural or
semisynthetic estrogen. Estradiol/polyestradiol are classified at the same
5th level. The same applies to estriol/polyestriol. Combinations of
estradiol and estriol are classified in G03CA53.
Combinations with other drugs, see G03CC.
Estropipate is classified in G03CA07 - estrone.
The DDD for nasal administration of estradiol is based on daily
treatment.
G03CB Synthetic estrogens, plain

This group comprises preparations, which contain synthetic estrogens
only.
Combinations with other drugs, see G03CC.
G03CC Estrogens, combinations with other drugs
This group includes combined preparations with natural, semisynthetic or
synthetic estrogens and other drugs.
G03CX Other estrogens
Tibolone is classified in this group even though the chemical structure is
different from the other estrogens.
G03D PROGESTOGENS
This group comprises progestogens and combinations, except
combinations with
- androgens, see G03E
- estrogens, see G03F
Hormonal contraceptives, see G03A
IUDs (intrauterine dervices) with progestogens, see G02BA.
Progestogens only used in neoplastic diseases, see L - Antineoplastic and
The DDDs are based on gynecological indications, for instance corpus
luteum insufficiency and endometriosis.
136
G03DA Pregnen (4) derivatives
G03DB Pregnadien derivatives
G03DC Estren derivatives
Tibolone is classified in G03CX.
G03E ANDROGENS AND FEMALE SEX HORMONES IN COMBINATION

This group comprises preparations with androgen and estrogen and/or
progestogen. The preparations are classified at 5th levels according to the
androgen.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of climacterical ailments.
G03EA Androgens and estrogens

G03EB Androgen, progestogen and estrogen in combination
G03EK Androgens and female sex hormones in combination with other drugs
This group comprises preparations, which in addition to the hormones
also contain other drugs.
G03F PROGESTOGENS AND ESTROGENS IN COMBINATION

This group comprises combined preparations used in the treatment of
menopausal symptoms, menstrual irregularities etc.
Hormonal contraceptives, see G03A.
The DDDs for combined preparations of estrogens and progestogens
are based on use in postmenopausal substitution therapy in cycles of
28 days. Thus, the DDD is 0.75 and 1 UD for 21 and 28 tablets cycle
packages, respectively.
G03FA Progestogens and estrogens, fixed combinations

This group comprises preparations, which contain combinations of
progestogens and estrogens. Sequential preparations are classified in
G03FB. Combination packages with separate tablets containing
progestogens and estrogens intended to be taken together are also
classified in this group. The preparations are classified at 5th levels
according to the progestogen. At each 5th level various estrogens may
occur.
Combinations of progestogens and estrogens used as contraceptives are
classified in G03A.
137
G03FB Progestogens and estrogens, sequential preparations
This group comprises preparations with varying contents of progestogens
and estrogens adjusted to the normal hormonal cycle. A package which is
intended for one cycle, may contain e.g. three types of tablets, each
designed to cover a special part of the menstrual period. Cycle packages
may contain some tablets with progestogens only. Combination packages
with separate tablets containing progestogens and estrogens intended to
be taken together and in sequence are also classified in this group.
5th levels are built up as in G03FA.
Hormonal contraceptives, sequential preparations, see G03AB.
G03G GONADOTROPINS AND OTHER OVULATION STIMULANTS

The DDDs are based on the initial treatment of anovulation.
G03GA Gonadotropins
This group comprises both naturally occurring gonad-stimulating
hormones and synthetic ovulation stimulants.
G03GA02 comprises products of human origin (e.g. menotrophin) while
G03GA30 comprises combinations of recombinant hormones (e.g.
follitropin alfa and lutropin alfa).
G03GB Ovulation stimulants, synthetic
G03H ANTIANDROGENS
G03HA Antiandrogens, plain
Finasteride used for treatment of benign prostatic hypertrophy is
classified in G04CB.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of hypersexualism.
G03HB Antiandrogens and estrogens

This group comprises all combinations of cyproterone and estrogen
regardless of indication.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of hirsutism or prophylaxis of
postmenopausal osteoporosis.
138
G03X OTHER SEX HORMONES AND MODULATORS OF THE GENITAL SYSTEM
This group comprises drugs modifying the genital functions, which cannot
Tibolone is classified in G03DC.
G03XA Antigonadotropins and similar agents
The DDDs of danazol and gestrinone are based on the treatment of
endometriosis.
G03XB Progesterone receptor modulators

Mifepristone indicated for Cushings’s syndrome is also classified in this
group.
The combination package of mifepristone tablet and misoprostol vaginal
tablets is classified in G03XB51.
The DDD for mifepristone (G03XB01) and for the combination package
of mifepristone tablet and misoprostol vaginal tablets (G03XB51) is
based on the use in termination of pregnancy.
The DDD for the combination package is given as amount of
mifepristone.
G03XC Selective estrogen receptor modulators

G03XX Other sex hormones and modulators of the genital system
Vaginal formulations of prasterone are classified here while systemic
formulations (tablets/injections) are classified in A14AA.
G04 UROLOGICALS
Antiseptic and antiinfective preparations for systemic use specifically used
in urinary tract infections, see J01.
Antiinfectives for systemic use, see group J.
Gynecological antiinfectives and antiseptics, see G01.
G04B UROLOGICALS
This group comprises urological preparations other than antiseptics and
antiinfectives.
G04BA Acidifiers
139
G04BC Urinary concrement solvents
This group comprises agents, which dissolve urinary concrements, e.g.
citrates. Plain potassium citrate preparations indicated for e.g. treatment
of renal tubular acidosis with calcium stones are classified in A12BA -
Potassium (A12 Mineral supplements).
G04BD Drugs for urinary frequency and incontinence
This group comprises antispasmodics specifically used in the urogenital
tractus.
Gastrointestinal antispasmodics, see A03.
Trospium in combination with analgesics are classified in A03DA.
The DDD for oral administered emeperonium is higher than the DDD
for parenteral administered formulations, due to low oral
bioavailability.
G04BE Drugs used in erectile dysfunction

Alprostadil intracavernosal injection for treatment of erectil dysfunction is
classified here, while formulations used to maintain the patency of the
ductus arteriosis in neonates are classified in C01EA01.
Combinations of papaverine and phentolamine for intracavernous
administration are classified under G04BE30 - combinations. Combinations
of phentolamine and aviptadil (polypeptide) are classified under
G04BE30 - combinations.
Phosphodisesterase inhibitors also indicated for pulmonary arterial
hypertension (PAH) are classified in this group. Other agents used for
treatment of PAH are classified in C02KX or in B01AC. Combinations of
ambrisentan or macitentan and phosphodisesterase inhibitors are
classified in C02KX - Antihypertensives for pulmonary arterial
hypertension.
Combinations of alpha-adrenoreceptor antagonists or testosterone-5-
alpha reductase inhibitors and phosphodisesterase inhibitors used in
benign prostatic hypertrophy are classified in G04CA or G04CB,
respectively.
The DDDs are based on single treatment of erectile dysfunction.
G04BX Other urologicals

This group comprises urologicals which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
140
Phenazopyridine, plain products, are classified here, while
phenazopyridine in combination with sulfonamides is classified according
to the sulfonamide in J01EB20, J01EC20 or J01ED20.
Local anesthetic formulations for treatment of premature ejaculation are
classified in N01B.
The DDD of phenazopyridine is based on analgesic treatment of
conditions such as cystitis, prostatitis and urethritis. The DDD for
phenylsalicylate is based on the prophylaxis of urinary tract infections.
The other DDDs are based on the prophylaxis of urinary concrements.
G04C DRUGS USED IN BENIGN PROSTATIC HYPERTROPHY

G04CA Alpha-adrenoreceptor antagonists
Alfuzosin and terazosin used in the management of urinary obstruction
caused by benign prostatic hypertrophy, are classified here, while other
alpha-adrenoreceptor blocking agents used both in the management of
urinary obstruction and hypertension (e.g. doxazosin) are classified in
C02CA.
G04CB Testosterone-5-alpha reductase inhibitors
Combinations/combination packages with alpha-adrenoreceptor
antagonists are classified in G04CA.
G04CX Other drugs used in benign prostatic hypertrophy
141
H SYSTEMIC HORMONAL PREPARATIONS, EXCL. SEX HORMONES
AND INSULINS
H01 PITUITARY AND HYPOTHALAMIC HORMONES AND ANALOGUES

A Anterior pituitary lobe hormones and analogues
B Posterior pituitary lobe hormones
C Hypothalamic hormones
H02 CORTICOSTEROIDS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

A Corticosteroids for systemic use, plain
B Corticosteroids for systemic use, combinations
C Antiadrenal preparations
H03 THYROID THERAPY

A Thyroid preparations
B Antithyroid preparations
C Iodine therapy
H04 PANCREATIC HORMONES

A Glycogenolytic hormones
H05 CALCIUM HOMEOSTASIS

A Parathyroid hormones and analogues
B Anti-parathyroid agents
142
H SYSTEMIC HORMONAL PREPARATIONS, EXCL. SEX
HORMONES AND INSULINS
This group comprises all hormonal preparations for systemic use, except:
- Insulins, see A10.
- Anabolic steroids, see A14.
- Catecholamines, see C01C and R03C.
- Sex hormones, see G03.
- Sex hormones used in treatment of neoplastic diseases, see L02.
- Metreleptin used for treatment of complications of leptin deficiency in
patients with generalised lipodystrophy is classified in A16AA.
The DDDs are generally based on the treatment or diagnosis of
endocrine disorders.
H01 PITUITARY AND HYPOTHALAMIC HORMONES AND ANALOGUES

H01A ANTERIOR PITUITARY LOBE HORMONES AND ANALOGUES
This group comprises anterior pituitary lobe hormones; extracts, purified
natural hormones and synthetic analogues.
Somatropin antagonists are classified in H01AX.
H01AA ACTH
This group comprises ACTH and synthetic analogues.
The DDD of corticotrophin is based on therapy, whereas that of
tetracosactide is based on use as a diagnostic agent.
H01AB Thyrotropin
Biological thyrotropin is also classified in H01AB01. Thyrotropin products
approved for diagnostic purposes only are classified in V04CJ.
The DDD for biological thyrotropin classified in H01AB01 is 5 U.
H01AC Somatropin and somatropin agonists

Mecasermin (insulin like growth factor) is classified in this group since it is
used on the same indications as somatropin and somatrem. High strength
preparations of sermorelin are classified here.
Low strength preparations used as diagnostic agents for pituitary function
are classified in V04CD.
143
Tesamorelin used in the treatment of HIV patients with lipodystrophy is
The DDDs are based on the treatment of growth retardation in children
with a body weight of 25 kg.
H01AX Other anterior pituitary lobe hormones and analogues

Somatropin antagonists are classified here.
H01B POSTERIOR PITUITARY LOBE HORMONES

This group comprises posterior pituitary lobe hormones; extracts, purified
natural hormones and synthetic analogues.
H01BA Vasopressin and analogues
The DDDs are based on the treatment of diabetes insipidus.
The DDD for terlipressin (as acetate) is based on treatment of bleeding
oesophageal varices.
H01BB Oxytocin and analogues

Oxytocin and analogues in combination with ergot alkaloids are classified
in G02A - Uterotonics
The DDDs are based on use in delivery.
H01C HYPOTHALAMIC HORMONES

This group comprises hypothalamic hormones; extracts, purified natural
hormones and synthetic analogues.
Hypothalamic hormones used as diagnostic agents for pituitary function
are classified in V04CD.
H01CA Gonadotropin-releasing hormones
Buserelin, goserelin, histrelin, leuprorelin, and triptorelin are classified in
L02AE Gonadotropin releasing hormone analogues.
Gonadorelin used as diagnostic agent is classified in V04CM.
The DDD of nafarelin is based on the treatment of endometriosis. No
other DDDs have been assigned, due to the highly variable dosages
used.
144
H01CB Somatostatin and analogues
Somatostatin, octreotide and lanreotide, which are also used in cancer,
The DDDs of octreotide and lanreotide are based on the treatment of
acromegaly.
H01CC Anti-gonadotropin-releasing hormones
H02 CORTICOSTEROIDS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

As a main rule, systemic corticosteroids should be classified in this group.
There is, however, one exception: M01BA - Antiinflammatory/
antirheumatic agents in combination with corticosteroids.
Anticorticosteroids are also classified in this group, see H02CA.
Corticosteroids for local oral treatment, see A01AC.
Enemas and rectal foams for local treatment of e.g. ulcerative colitis, see
A07E. Oral corticosteroids solely indicated for the treatment of intestinal
inflammatory diseases are classified in A07E - Intestinal antiinflammatory
agents.
Corticosteroids for topical use, see D07.
Combined corticosteroid preparations for local treatment of acne, see
D10AA.
Corticosteroids in combination with antiinfectives/antiseptics for local
treatment of gynecological infections, see G01B.
Corticosteroids for nasal use, see R01AD.
Corticosteroids for inhalation, see R03BA.
Corticosteroids, eye/ear preparations, see S.
H02A CORTICOSTEROIDS FOR SYSTEMIC USE, PLAIN

Only plain preparations are classified in this group. The group also
includes corticosteroid preparations for local injection.
H02AA Mineralocorticoids
The DDDs are based on substitution therapy in Addison's disease.
H02AB Glucocorticoids
Oral formulations used solely in local treatment are classified in A07EA.
145
Depot preparations may have different DDDs, compared to other
formulations, due to different indications.
H02B CORTICOSTEROIDS FOR SYSTEMIC USE, COMBINATIONS

This group comprises all combined preparations, e.g. combinations with
local anesthetics.
No DDDs have been assigned.
H02BX Corticosteroids for systemic use, combinations
H02C ANTIADRENAL PREPARATIONS

H02CA Anticorticosteroids
Trilostane used in Cushing’s syndrome is classified in this group.
Mifeprostone used in Cushing’s syndrome is classified in G03XB.
Metyrapone used in Cushing’s syndrome is classified in V04CD.
Pharmaceutical formulations of ketoconazole solely indicated in Cushing’s
syndrome are classified in this group.
The DDD of trilostan is based on the treatment of Cushing’s syndrome.
H03 THYROID THERAPY

H03A THYROID PREPARATIONS
This group comprises thyroid extracts and synthetic analogues used in the
treatment of hypothyrosis.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of hypothyrosis.
H03AA Thyroid hormones

This group comprises natural and synthetic thyroid hormones.
Combinations of levothyroxine and liothyronine are classified at a
separate 5th level: H03AA03.
Liothyronine hydrochloride is classified in H03AA02.
H03B ANTITHYROID PREPARATIONS

This group comprises preparations used in the treatment of hyperthyrosis.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of hyperthyrosis.
146
H03BA Thiouracils
H03BB Sulfur-containing imidazole derivatives
H03BC Perchlorates
H03BX Other antithyroid preparations
H03C IODINE THERAPY

This group comprises iodine preparations for systemic use.
H03CA Iodine therapy
The DDDs are based on systemic therapy in thyroid disease. The DDD is
given in amount of iodide.
H04 PANCREATIC HORMONES

H04A GLYCOGENOLYTIC HORMONES
H04AA Glycogenolytic hormones
The pancreas glycogenolytic hormone glucagon is classified in this group.
Diazoxide, which is also used for treatment of hypoglycemia, is classified
in C02DA01 and V03AH01.
Insulins are classified in A10A.
The DDD of glucagon is based on single dose treatment of
hypoglycemia.
H05 CALCIUM HOMEOSTASIS

Drugs acting on calcium homeostasis are classified in this group.
Vitamin-D preparations, see A11CC.
H05A PARATHYROID HORMONES AND ANALOGUES

H05AA Parathyroid hormones and analogues
Extracts from parathyroid glands are classified in this group.
147
H05B ANTI-PARATHYROID AGENTS
H05BA Calcitonin preparations
Calcitonin, natural and synthetic, is classified in this group. Other drugs
for treatment of hypercalcemia, see M05B.
The DDDs of the calcitonins are based on the treatment of Paget's
disease.
H05BX Other anti-parathyroid agents

Paricalcitol and doxercalciferol indicated for the prevention and treatment
of secondary hyperparathyroidism are classified here.
Oral formulations of calcifediol, solely approved for treatment of renal
secondary hyperparathyroidism are classified here, while all other
pharmaceutical formulations of calcifediol are classified in A11CC06.
The DDD for cinacalcet is based on the treatment of secondary
hyperparathyroidism.
148
J ANTIINFECTIVES FOR SYSTEMIC USE
J01 ANTIBACTERIALS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

A Tetracyclines
B Amphenicols
C Beta-lactam antibacterials, penicillins
D Other beta-lactam antibacterials
E Sulfonamides and trimethoprim
F Macrolides, lincosamides and streptogramins
G Aminoglycoside antibacterials
M Quinolone antibacterials
R Combinations of antibacterials
X Other antibacterials
J02 ANTIMYCOTICS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

A Antimycotics for systemic use
J04 ANTIMYCOBACTERIALS
A Drugs for treatment of tuberculosis
B Drugs for treatment of lepra
J05 ANTIVIRALS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

A Direct acting antivirals
J06 IMMUNE SERA AND IMMUNOGLOBULINS

A Immune sera
B Immunoglobulins
J07 VACCINES
A Bacterial vaccines
B Viral vaccines
C Bacterial and viral vaccines, combined
X Other vaccines
149
J ANTIINFECTIVES FOR SYSTEMIC USE
Antiinfectives are also classified in the following groups:
A02BD Combinations for eradication of Helicobacter pylori
A07A Intestinal antiinfectives
D01 Antifungals for dermatological use
D06 Antibiotics and chemotherapeutics for dermatological use
D07C Corticosteroids, combinations with antibiotics
D09AA Ointment dressings with antiinfectives
D10AF Antiinfectives for treatment of acne
G01 Gynecological antiinfectives and antiseptics
P Antiparasitic products, insecticides and repellents
R02AB Antibiotics
S01/
S02/
S03 Eye and ear preparations with antiinfectives
Even systemically administered antibacterials and antimycotics may be
classified in other groups if their target is exclusively local, e.g. the skin -
D01 - Antifungals for dermatological use.
Inhaled antiinfectives are classified in J.
The DDDs for the antiinfectives are as a main rule based on the use in
infections of moderate severity. However, some antiinfectives are only
used in severe infections and their DDDs are assigned accordingly. The
DDDs assigned are based on daily treatment. The duration of the
treatment periods is not taken into consideration. For antiinfectives
given in a high initially starting dose followed by a lower daily
"maintenance" dose, the DDDs are based on the "maintenance" dose if
the total duration of the treat-ment course is more than one week. If,
however, the treatment course is 7 days or less, the DDDs are assigned
according to the average daily dose i.e. the total course dose divided
by the number of treatment days (e.g azithromycin).
150
J01 ANTIBACTERIALS FOR SYSTEMIC USE
This group comprises antibacterials for systemic use, except anti-
mycobacterials, which are classified in J04. The antibacterials are
classified according to their mode of action and chemistry.
Combinations of two or more systemic antibacterials from different third
levels are classified in J01R, except combinations of sulfonamides and
trimethoprim, which are classified at a separate 4th level, J01EE.
Combinations of antibacterials and tuberculostatics are classified in
J04AM.
Combinations of antibacterials with other drugs, including local
anesthetics or vitamins, are classified at separate 5th levels in the
respective antibacterial group by using the 50-series.
Inhaled antiinfectives are classified here based on the fact that
preparations for inhalation can not be separated from preparations for
injection.
J01A TETRACYCLINES
J01AA Tetracyclines
This group comprises tetracycline antibacterials inhibiting the bacterial
protein synthesis through binding to the 30-S part of ribosomes.
The tetracyclines have different DDDs due to kinetic differences. The
use of tetracyclines in long-term, low dose treatment of acne is not
taken into account in the assignment of DDDs.
J01B AMPHENICOLS
J01BA Amphenicols
This group comprises amphenicol antibacterials inhibiting the bacterial
protein synthesis.
Thiamphenicol acetylcysteinate glycinate for inhalation is classified in
J01BA52.
J01C BETA-LACTAM ANTIBACTERIALS, PENICILLINS

This group comprises penicillin beta-lactam antibacterials, inhibiting the
bacterial cell wall synthesis. Combinations of penicillins from different 4th
levels, including beta-lactamase inhibitors, are classified in J01CR.
151
J01CA Penicillins with extended spectrum
This group comprises penicillins with enhanced activity against gram
negative rods, e.g. ampicillin and similar antibiotics.
The esters, for instance pivampicillin and pivmecillinam, have a higher
bioavailability and thus a lower DDD than the corresponding non-ester
compounds.
The DDDs for some of the compounds, for instance carbenicillin,
piperacillin, ticarcillin and sulbenicillin, are based on the dosages used
for narrow indications, i.e. life threatening infections.
J01CE Beta-lactamase sensitive penicillins

Benzylpenicillin and phenoxymethylpenicillin have different DDDs due
to differences in indications, route of administration and
bioavailability. The DDDs for the combination of benzylpenicillin and
procaine penicillin is based on the treatment of syphilis, see list of
DDDs for combination products, www.whocc.no.
J01CF Beta-lactamase resistant penicillins

J01CG Beta-lactamase inhibitors
The DDD for sulbactam is based on its use together with ampicillin,
usually in a dose ratio of 1:2 respectively.
J01CR Combinations of penicillins, incl. beta-lactamase inhibitors

This group comprises combinations of penicillins and/or beta-lactamase
inhibitors. Combinations containing one penicillin and enzyme inhibitor
are classified at different 5th levels according to the penicillin.
Combinations of two or more penicillins with or without enzyme inhibitor
are classified at a separate 5th level, J01CR50. Sultamicillin, a prodrug for
sulbactam and ampicillin, is given a separate 5th level code: J01CR04.
The DDD for sultamicillin, a prodrug for sulbactam and ampicillin, is
lower than the corresponding DDD for the ordinary combination due
to higher bioavailability.
152
J01D OTHER BETA-LACTAM ANTIBACTERIALS
This group comprises beta-lactam antibacterials, other than penicillins.
The cephalosporins are classified into subgroups according to generations.
The reference applied when defining generations is “Principles and
Practice of Infectious Diseases” by Mandell, Douglas and Benett, sixth
edition, 2005. For the definitions used in this textbook, see under J01DB,
J01DC, J01DD and J01DE.
Combinations with beta-lactamase inhibitors are classified by using the
50-series.
The cephalosporins are used in highly variable dosages for different
indications, which should be reflected in the assigned DDDs. The
indications for use of the cephalosporins (i.e. the severity of the
infections) vary rather extensively from one country to another. The
assigned DDDs are placed in the upper area of the dose range for
moderate to severe infections.
J01DB First-generation cephalosporins

The first generation compounds have relatively narrow spectrum of
activity focused primarily on the gram-positive cocci.
J01DC Second-generation cephalosporins
The second generation cephalosporins have a variable activity against
gram-positive cocci but have increased activity against gram-negative
bacteria. The cephamycin group is included in the second-generation
cephalosporins.
J01DD Third-generation cephalosporins
The third generation cephalosporins have a marked activity against gram-
negative bacteria. Limited activity against gram-positive cocci, particularly
methicillin susceptible S. aureus, might occur.
J01DE Fourth-generation cephalosporins
The fourth generation cephalosporins have activity against gram-positive
cocci and a broad array of gram-negative bacteria, including P. aeruginosa
and many of the Enterobacteriaceae with inducible chromosomal b-
lactamases.
153
J01DF Monobactams
Arginin and lysine salts of aztreonam are classified in J01DF01; thus
aztreonam for inhalation is classified together with systemic formulations.
J01DH Carbapenems
The DDD for meropenem is based on treatment of severe infections.
J01DI Other cephalosporins and penems
J01E SULFONAMIDES AND TRIMETHOPRIM

This group comprises systemic sulfonamide and trimethoprim
preparations. Combinations of sulfonamide and trimethoprim are
classified in J01EE. Preparations containing two or more sulfonamides are
classified within the different 4th levels, using the 5th level code 20.
In such combinations, the half-life of the most long-acting sulfonamide
determines the classification. Sulfonamides in combinations with other
antibacterials (excl. trimethoprim) are classified in J01R. Dapsone is
classified in J04 - Antimycobacterials. See also A07A - Intestinal
antiinfectives.
Preparations, which in addition contain a urine acidifier, such as vitamin C,
calcium- or ammonium chloride, are classified at the plain 5th levels.
The DDDs for the sulfonamides are related to the duration of effect,
i.e. usually the long-acting sulfonamides will have lower DDDs than the
short-acting.
J01EA Trimethoprim and derivatives

The DDDs are based on the treatment of acute urinary-tract infections.
J01EB Short-acting sulfonamides

This group comprises sulfonamides with a biological half-life not exceeding
approx. 7 hours.
J01EC Intermediate-acting sulfonamides
This group comprises sulfonamides with a biological half-life of approx.
11-12 hours.
J01ED Long-acting sulfonamides
This group comprises sulfonamides with a biological half-life of approx. 35
hours or more.
154
J01EE Combinations of sulfonamides and trimethoprim, incl. derivatives
When establishing DDDs for combination products, both components
are taken into consideration, see list of DDDs for combination
products, www.whocc.no.
J01F MACROLIDES, LINCOSAMIDES AND STREPTOGRAMINS

This group comprises macrolide, lincosamide and streptogramin
antibacterials inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis through binding to the
50-S part of the ribosomes.
J01FA Macrolides
Erythromycin ethylsuccinate tablets have been assigned a higher DDD
than other preparations of erythromycin due to a lower bio-
availability. This DDD is mainly based on the dose recommendations.
The oral DDD for azithromycin is based on a 5-day regimen.
J01FF Lincosamides
Orally and parenterally administered clindamycin have different DDDs
due to different indications, i.e. the intestinal and systemic infections,
respectively.
J01FG Streptogramins
The streptogramin components dalfopristin/quinupristin are
semisynthetic derivatives of pristinamycin. The two components have
synergistic antibacterial effect and are always used together.
Quinupristin/dalfopristin are therefore classified at the ATC plain level
J01FG02.
J01G AMINOGLYCOSIDE ANTIBACTERIALS

This group comprises aminoglycoside antibacterials disturbing the
bacterial protein synthesis through binding to the 30-S part of the
ribosomes.
J01GA Streptomycins
Streptomycins in combination with antimycobacterials are classified in
J04AM.
155
J01GB Other aminoglycosides
Tobramycin and amikacin for inhalation are classified together with the
systemic formulations in J01GB01 and J01GB06 respectively.
The DDDs for the aminoglycosides are based on use in severe
infections.
J01M QUINOLONE ANTIBACTERIALS

This group comprises quinolone antibacterials, inhibiting the bacterial
DNA-gyrase.
J01MA Fluoroquinolones
Flumequine is classified in J01MB. Alalevonadifloxacin is classified in
J01MA24 together with levonadifloxacin.
The DDDs for the fluoroquinolones are mainly based on the treatment
of respiratory tract infections.
The DDDs for pefloxacin, enoxacin and norfloxacin are based on the
treatment of complicated urinary tract infections.
J01MB Other quinolones

The DDDs are generally based on the treatment of acute urinary tract
infections. The DDD for rosoxacin is based on single dose treatment of
gonorrhoea.
J01R COMBINATIONS OF ANTIBACTERIALS

This group comprises combinations of two or more antibacterials for
systemic use from different ATC 3rd levels.
The detailed classification of antibacterial combinations in J01RA is based
on the general concern with the use of antibacterials worldwide and the
need for drug monitoring, incl. mapping of the use with resistance
patterns.
J01RA Combinations of antibacterials
Combinations of urinary antiseptics and antiinfectives are classified in
J01RA02.
156
J01X OTHER ANTIBACTERIALS
This group comprises antibacterials with various modes of action not
J01XA Glycopeptide antibacterials
This group comprises glycopeptide antibacterials, inhibiting the cell wall
synthesis of gram positive bacteria. Lipoglycopeptide antibacterials are
also included in this group. Teicoplanin and intravenous preparations of
vancomycin are classified in this group. Oral formulations containing
vancomycin are classified in A07A.
J01XB Polymyxins
This group comprises polymyxin antibacterials acting on the bacterial
cytoplasm membrane. Oral formulations containing colistin are classified
in A07A.
J01XC Steroid antibacterials
This group comprises steroid antibacterials, inhibiting the binding of
bacterial transfer-RNA and the 50-S part of the ribosomes.
J01XD Imidazole derivatives
This group comprises imidazole antibacterials acting through active
metabolites in anaerobic bacteria. Only formulations for parenteral use of
e.g. metronidazole are classified in this group. Oral formulations and
suppositories of imidazole derivatives are classified in P01 -
Antiprotozoals. Pessaries are classified in G01 - Gynecological
antiinfectives and antiseptics.
The DDDs for the parenteral imidazole formulations are based on the
treatment of anaerobic bacteria infections.
J01XE Nitrofuran derivatives

Nitrofurantoin in combination with phenazopyridine is classified in
J01XE51.
The DDDs are generally based on the treatment of acute urinary tract
infections.
157
J01XX Other antibacterials
The parenteral DDD for fosfomycin is based on the use of a single
prophylactic dose in connection with surgery, whilst the oral DDD is
based on treatment of uncomplicated lower urinary tract infections
given as a single dose of fosfomycin trometamol.
The DDD for spectinomycin is based on the use of a single dose for
treatment of uncomplicated gonorrhea.
The DDD for methenamine is based on prophylaxis of urinary tract
infections. The DDDs for mandelic acid and nitroxoline are based on
the treatment of acute urinary tract infections.
J02 ANTIMYCOTICS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

J02A ANTIMYCOTICS FOR SYSTEMIC USE
This group does not include antimycotics specifically for dermatological
use even if they are administered systemically (see D01B).
Antimycotics - see also:
A07A Intestinal antiinfectives
D01 Antifungals for dermatological use
G01 Gynecological antiinfectives and antiseptics
Fumagillin used in the treatment of intestinal microsporidiosis is classified
in P01AX.
J02AA Antibiotics
The DDD for amphotericin B is based on the conventional formulation.
Dosages of other formulations (e.g. liposomal) of amphotericin B may
vary considerably. This should be taken into consideration when
comparing drug use.
J02AB Imidazole derivatives

Pharmaceutical formulations of ketoconazole solely indicated for the
treatment of Cushing’s syndrome are classified in H02CA -
Anticorticosteroids.
158
J02AC Triazole and tetrazole derivatives
All oral and parenteral formulations of fluconazole are classified here.
Fosfluconazole (prodrug of fluconazole) is classified at the same 5th level
as fluconazole. Vaginal formulations of triazole derivatives, see G01AG.
The prodrug fosfluconazole is classified together with fluconazole in
J02AC01.
The oral DDD for posaconazole is based on the recommended dose for
gastro-resistant tablets.
J02AX Other antimycotics for systemic use
J04 ANTIMYCOBACTERIALS
This group comprises drugs mainly used for the treatment of tuberculosis
or lepra. However, streptomycins are classified in J01G - Aminoglycoside
antibacterials. Streptomycin in combination with antimycobacterials are
classified in J04AM.
J04A DRUGS FOR TREATMENT OF TUBERCULOSIS

The DDDs are based on combination therapy in the treatment of
tuberculosis. DDDs for combination products see www.whocc.no.
J04AA Aminosalicylic acid and derivatives
Calcium aluminoparaaminosalicylate is classified together with calcium

aminosalicylate in J04AA03.
J04AB Antibiotics
This group comprises antibiotics specifically used in tuberculosis, except
streptomycin - see comment under J04AM. Other antibiotics, see J01 -
Antibacterials for systemic use.
The DDD for rifapentine is based on the first 6 months treatment
period, including both the initial phase and the continuous phase.
J04AC Hydrazides
Combinations of isoniazid and rifampicin or other tuberculostatics are
classified in J04AM.
J04AD Thiocarbamide derivatives
J04AK Other drugs for treatment of tuberculosis
159
J04AM Combinations of drugs for treatment of tuberculosis
Combinations of drugs classified in J04AA - J04AK are classified in this
group (e. g. isoniazid + rifampicin).
Combinations of antimycobacterials and antibacterials for systemic use
(J01) are classified here.
J04B DRUGS FOR TREATMENT OF LEPRA

J04BA Drugs for treatment of lepra
Thalidomide, which is also used for treatment of lepra, is classified in
L04AX.
J05 ANTIVIRALS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

This group comprises specific antiviral agents, excl. vaccines.
Antivirals for dermatological use, see D06BB.
Antivirals for ophthalmological use, see S01A - Antiinfectives.
Amantadine, which is also used as an antiviral agent, is classified in N04BB.
J05A DIRECT ACTING ANTIVIRALS

This group comprises agents acting directly on the virus. All antivirals,
including monoclonal antibodies, used in the treatment of HIV are
J05AA Thiosemicarbazones
J05AB Nucleosides and nucleotides excl. reverse transcriptase inhibitors
Ribavirin is classified in J05AP.
The combinations of ribavirin and peginterferon alfa-2a or peginterferon
alfa-2b are classified in L03AB.
The DDDs for aciclovir, valaciclovir and famciclovir are based on the
treatment of herpes zoster infections.
The DDD for ganciclovir is based on the treatment of cytomegalovirus
infections in immunosuppressed patients.
The DDD for cidofovir is based on the treatment of CMV-retinitis in
AIDS patients.
J05AC Cyclic amines

Amantadine is classified in N04 - Anti-Parkinson drugs.
160
J05AD Phosphonic acid derivatives
The DDD for foscarnet is based on the treatment of CMV-retinitis in
AIDS patients.
J05AE Protease inhibitors

The DDDs are based on combination therapy in HIV infections.
The DDDs for atazanavir and fosamprenavir are based on combination
therapy with ritonavir as a pharmacokinetic enhancer.
The DDD for saquinavir is based on the dose recommendations for
hard capsules.
J05AF Nucleoside and nucleotide reverse transcriptase inhibitors

The DDD for tenofovir disoproxil is 245 mg and is equivalent to 300 mg
tenofovir disoproxil fumarat.
The DDDs for entecavir and telbivudine are based on monotherapy in
the treatment of chronic hepatitis B virus infections.
J05AG Non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors

Vaginal ring with dapiravine for risk reduction of HIV-1 infection is
classified in G01AX.
J05AH Neuraminidase inhibitors

All neuraminidase inhibitors are classified here, regardless of formulation.
The DDD for oseltamivir is based on the treatment of influenza.
J05AJ Integrase inhibitors
J05AP Antivirals for treatment of HCV infections

This group includes both single substances and combinations.
The inhalation DDD for ribavirin is based on the treatment of
respiratory syncytial viral (RSV) infections in neonates and infants.
161
J05AR Antivirals for treatment of HIV infections, combinations
Combinations with pharmacokinetic enhancers are classified in this group,
regardless of their antiviral effect. Plain products with cobicistat are
classified in V03AX.
See list of DDDs for combination products, www.whocc.no.
J05AX Other antivirals
J06 IMMUNE SERA AND IMMUNOGLOBULINS

No DDDs have been assigned, except for nebacumab in J06BC01.
J06A IMMUNE SERA

J06AA Immune sera
This group comprises specific antisera of non-human origin.
J06B IMMUNOGLOBULINS
This group comprises normal human immunoglobulins, specific
immunoglobulins and monoclonal antibodies.
J06BA Immunoglobulins, normal human
Products containing immunoglobulin and hyaluronidase are classified in
J06BA01.
J06BB Specific immunoglobulins
Combinations with vaccines are classified in J07.
J06BC Antibacterial monoclonal antibodies
J06BD Antiviral monoclonal antibodies
Nirsevimab for prophylactic use is classified in J06BD08.
J07 VACCINES
The vaccines are divided in bacterial, viral and combinations of bacterial
and viral at separate ATC 3rd levels. Subdivision at the 4th level is made
mainly according to indication. The ATC 5th level does not reflect the
manufacturing process, e.g. recombinant is not included in the level
names.
Combinations of vaccines within the same 3rd level are given separate 5th
levels using the 50-series. 5th levels may contain adjuvans.
162
See comments under the 4th levels.
No DDDs have been assigned.
J07A BACTERIAL VACCINES

J07AC Anthrax vaccines
J07AD Brucellosis vaccines
J07AE Cholera vaccines
Combinations with typhoid vaccine are classified in this group.
J07AF Diphtheria vaccines
Different strengths of the diphtheria vaccines are classified at the same
5th level. Combinations with tetanus vaccine are classified in J07AM.
Combinations with both tetanus and pertussis are classified in J07AJ.
Combinations with haemophilus influenza and tetanus vaccines are
classified in J07AG.
Combinatins with poliomyelitis and/or rubella are classified in J07CA.
J07AG Haemophilus influenzae B vaccines
Combinations with diphtheria and tetanus vaccines are classified here.
Combinations with pertussis and toxoids are classified here.
Combinations with poliomyelitis are classified in J07CA.
J07AH Meningococcal vaccines
Meningococcal vaccines are classified at separate 5th levels according to
the number of serotypes of neisseria meningitis contained in the vaccine.
Monovalent vaccines obtained from group A are classified at a separate
5th level, while other monovalent vaccines are classified together.
Products containing oligosaccharides instead of polysaccharides may be
included at each 5th level.
J07AJ Pertussis vaccines
Combinations with tetanus and/or diphtheria vaccine are classified in this
group.
Combinations with haemophilus influenzae B are classified in J07AG.
Combinations with polimyelitis are classified in J07CA.
J07AK Plague vaccines
163
J07AL Pneumococcal vaccines
J07AM Tetanus vaccines
Combinations with tetanus immunoglobulin are classified in this group.
Combinations with diphtheria and/or typhoid vaccines are classified in
J07AM51.
Combinations with diphtheria and pertussis vaccines are classified in
J07AJ.
Combinations with haemophilus influenza and diphteria vaccines are
classified in J07AG.
Combinations with poliomyelitis and/or rubella are classified in J07CA.
J07AN Tuberculosis vaccines
J07AP Typhoid vaccines
Combinations with tetanus vaccine, also when including diphtheria
vaccine, are classified in J07AM.
J07AR Typhus (exanthematicus) vaccines
J07AX Other bacterial vaccines
This group comprises bacterial vaccines, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups, e.g. Q fever vaccine.
J07B VIRAL VACCINES

J07BA Encephalitis vaccines
J07BB Influenza vaccines
Split virus vaccine is classified in J07BB02 together with surface antigen.
J07BC Hepatitis vaccines
Recombinant and plasma derived hepatitis vaccines are classified at the
same 5th level.
Therapeutic vaccines for chronic hepatitis B are classified in J07BC01.
Combinations of malaria and hepatitis B vaccines are classified in
J07XA01 - malaria vaccines.
J07BD Measles vaccines
Combinations with mumps and/or rubella are classified in this group.
164
J07BE Mumps vaccines
Combinations with measles vaccine, with or without rubella, are classified
in J07BD. Combinations with rubella vaccine are classified in J07BJ.
J07BF Poliomyelitis vaccines
Poliomyelitis vaccines are classified according to the number of virus types
included and according to administration form, i.e. oral or parenteral.
Combinations with diphteria/tetanus/pertussis and/or Haemophilus
influenzae B are classified in J07CA.
J07BG Rabies vaccines
J07BH Rota virus diarrhea vaccines
J07BJ Rubella vaccines
Combinations with mumps vaccine are classified in this group.
Combinations with measles vaccine, with or without mumps vaccine, are
classified in J07BD.
Combinations with diphteria and tetanus are classified in J07CA.
J07BK Varicella zoster vaccines
J07BL Yellow fever vaccines
J07BM Papillomavirus vaccines
J07BN Covid-19 vaccines
J07BX Other viral vaccines
J07C BACTERIAL AND VIRAL VACCINES, COMBINED

J07CA Bacterial and viral vaccines, combined
Combinations including bacterial and viral vaccines are classified at
separate 5th levels. No specific system for subdivision is established.
J07X OTHER VACCINES

J07XA Parasitic vaccines
Combinations of malaria and hepatitis B vaccines are classified in
J07XA01 - malaria vaccines.
165
L ANTINEOPLASTIC AND IMMUNOMODULATING AGENTS
L01 ANTINEOPLASTIC AGENTS

A Alkylating agents
B Antimetabolites
C Plant alkaloids and other natural products
D Cytotoxic antibiotics and related substances
E Protein kinase inhibitors
F Monoclonal antibodies and antibody drug conjugates
X Other antineoplastic agents
L02 ENDOCRINE THERAPY

A Hormones and related agents
B Hormone antagonists and related agents
L03 IMMUNOSTIMULANTS
A Immunostimulants
L04 IMMUNOSUPPRESSANTS
A Immunosuppressants
166
L ANTINEOPLASTIC AND IMMUNOMODULATING AGENTS
This group comprises preparations used in the treatment of neoplastic
diseases, and immunomodulating agents.
Corticosteroids for systemic use, see H02.
L01 ANTINEOPLASTIC AGENTS

Combination products are classified in L01XY - Combinations of
antineoplastic agents.
Detoxifying agents used in connection with high dose treatment of
antineoplastic agents are classified in V03AF (e.g. calcium folinate).
Radiopharmaceuticals used in the treatment of cancer are classified in
V10X.
DDDs have been established for the protein kinase inhibitors in L01E
only.
No DDDs have been established for substances classified in ATC 3rd
level L01A, L01B, L01C, L01D, L01F or L01X. This is because of highly
individualised use and wide dosage ranges. The doses used vary
substantially because of various types and severity of neoplastic
diseases, and also because of the extensive use of combination
therapy.
The consumption of the antineoplastic agents is in some countries
measured in grams. This is recommended as a method to be used
internationally for these particular agents.
L01A ALKYLATING AGENTS

L01AA Nitrogen mustard analogues
L01AB Alkyl sulfonates
L01AC Ethylene imines
L01AD Nitrosoureas
L01AG Epoxides
L01AX Other alkylating agents
L01B ANTIMETABOLITES
L01BA Folic acid analogues
Trimetrexate is classified in P01AX - Other agents against amoebiasis and
other protozoal agents.
167
Pre-filled syringes/pens of methotrexate for use in non-cancer indications
and all oral formulations are classified in L04AX03.
L01BB Purine analogues
Parenteral formulations of cladribine used in cancer are classified in this
group, while oral formulations for multiple sclerosis are classified in
L04AA.
L01BC Pyrimidine analogues
Fluorouracil for systemic and local treatment is classified here.
L01C PLANT ALKALOIDS AND OTHER NATURAL PRODUCTS

L01CA Vinca alkaloids and analogues
Synthetic analogues are also classified in this group.
L01CB Podophyllotoxin derivatives
Antivirals for topical use, e.g. podophyllotoxin, see D06BB - Antivirals.
L01CC Colchicine derivatives
Colchicine is classified in M04AC01.
L01CD Taxanes
L01CD01 - paclitaxel includes solvent based paclitaxel and paclitaxel
albumin.
L01CE Topoisomerase 1 (TOP1) inhibitors
All formulations of irinotecan (e.g. liposomal) are classified in L01CE02.
L01CX Other plant alkaloids and natural products
L01D CYTOTOXIC ANTIBIOTICS AND RELATED SUBSTANCES

L01DA Actinomycines
L01DB Anthracyclines and related substances
L01DC Other cytotoxic antibiotics
Mitomycin used in glaucoma surgery is also classified here.
L01E PROTEIN KINASE INHIBITORS

This group comprises protein kinase inhibitors used for neoplastic
diseases. Substances are classified according to their main target.
168
Substances which are multi-targeted without a clear main target are
classified in L01EX.
Lipid kinase inhibitors (phosphatidylinositol-3-kinase (Pi3K) inhibitors) are
classified in L01EM.
L01EA BCR-ABL tyrosine kinase inhibitors
The DDDs are based on the standard starting dose in the treatment of
chronic myeloid leukemia in early phase (chronic phase).
L01EB Epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR) tyrosine kinase inhibitors

Substances inhibiting both HER2 and EGFR indicated for breast cancer are
classified in L01EH.
The DDD for erlotinib is based on the treatment of non-small cell lung
cancer (NSCLC).
L01EC B-Raf serine-threonine kinase (BRAF) inhibitors

The DDD for encorafenib is based on the treatment of melanoma.
L01ED Anaplastic lymphoma kinase (ALK) inhibitors

Substances which are multi-targeted, but where ALK is considered the
main target, are classified in this group.
L01EE Mitogen-activated protein kinase (MEK) inhibitors
L01EF Cyclin-dependent kinase (CDK) inhibitors
L01EG Mammalian target of rapamycin (mTOR) kinase inhibitors
Parenteral formulations of sirolimus used for neoplastic diseases are
classified in this group, while oral formulations used for organ
transplantation are classified in L04AA.
L01EH Human epidermal growth factor receptor 2 (HER2) tyrosine kinase
inhibitors
Substances inhibiting both HER2 and EGFR indicated for breast cancer are
L01EJ Janus-associated kinase (JAK) inhibitors
The DDDs are based on the treatment of myelofibrosis.
L01EK Vascular endothelial growth factor receptor (VEGFR) tyrosine kinase

inhibitors
169
L01EL Bruton's tyrosine kinase (BTK) inhibitors
The DDD for ibrutinib is based on the treatment of chronic lymphocytic
leukaemia (CLL) .
L01EM Phosphatidylinositol-3-kinase (Pi3K) inhibitors

L01EN Fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR) tyrosine kinase inhibitors
L01EX Other protein kinase inhibitors
This group comprises other protein kinase inhibitors which cannot be
classified in the preceding groups. Substances which are multi-targeted
without a clear main target are also classified in this group.
The DDD for cabozantinib is based on the treatment (tablets) of renal

cell carcinoma and hepatocellular carcinoma.
The DDD for lenvatinib is based on the treatment of renal cell
carcinoma.
The DDD for midostaurin is based on the treatment of acute myeloid
leukaemia (AML).
L01F MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES AND ANTIBODY DRUG CONJUGATES

Monoclonal antibodies mainly indicated for the treatment of cancer are
Monoclonal antibodies combined with hyaluronidase are classified at the
same 5th level as the plain monoclonal antibody.
L01FA CD20 (Clusters of Differentiation 20) inhibitors
High strength products of ofatumumab used for the treatment of chronic
lymphocytic leukaemia (CLL) are classified in this group, while low strength
products for treatment of relapsing multiple sclerosis (RMS) are classified
in L04AA.
L01FB CD22 (Clusters of Differentiation 22) inhibitors
L01FC CD38 (Clusters of Differentiation 38) inhibitors
L01FD HER2 (Human Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor 2) inhibitors
L01FE EGFR (Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor) inhibitors
L01FF PD-1/PDL-1 (Programmed cell death protein 1/death ligand 1) inhibitors
170
L01FG VEGF/VEGFR (Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor) inhibitors
Bevacizumab used in age-related macular degeneration (AMD) is classified
in S01LA08.
L01FX Other monoclonal antibodies and antibody drug conjugates
Dinutuximab and dinutuximab beta are classified at the same 5th level
(L01FX06).
L01X OTHER ANTINEOPLASTIC AGENTS

This group comprises antineoplastic preparations which cannot be
L01XA Platinum compounds
L01XB Methylhydrazines
L01XD Sensitizers used in photodynamic/radiation therapy
L01XF Retinoids for cancer treatment
L01XG Proteasome inhibitors
L01XH Histone deacetylase (HDAC) inhibitors
L01XJ Hedgehog pathway inhibitors
L01XK Poly (ADP-ribose) polymerase (PARP) inhibitors
L01XL Antineoplastic cell and gene therapy
L01XX Other antineoplastic agents
Also antineoplastic agents for dermatological use are classified here.
All asparaginases regardless of origins are classified in L01XX02. The
50-series codes are used for single substances due to lack of numbers.
Phosphatidylinositol-3-kinase (Pi3K) inhibitors are classified in L01EM.
L01XY Combinations of antineoplastic agents
All combinations of antineoplastic agents in L01 - Antineoplastic agents
Combinations of antineoplastic agents with hyaluronidase are classified at
the same 5th level as the combinations of antineoplastic agents without
hyaluronidase.
171
L02 ENDOCRINE THERAPY
Estrogens and progestogens used specifically in the treatment of
neoplastic diseases are classified in this group. This means that some
strengths may be classified in this group, while remaining strengths are
classified in G03 - Sex hormones and modulators of the genital system.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of cancer (breast-, endometrial,
and prostatic).
L02A HORMONES AND RELATED AGENTS

Antigrowth hormones like somatostatin and octreotide, which are also
used in the treatment of neoplastic diseases, are classified in H01CB.
L02AA Estrogens
Polyestradiol and combined products, which contain polyestradiol and
local anestethics, are classified at the plain level L02AA02 - polyestradiol
phosphate.
L02AB Progestogens
L02AE Gonadotropin releasing hormone analogues
See also H01CA - Gonadotropin releasing hormones.
A combi-pack containing leuprorelin (L02AE02) injection and bicalutamide
(L02BB03) tablets indicated for prostate cancer is classified in L02AE51.
The DDD of 60 mcg for leuprorelin implant is based on 5 mg
implant/90 days.
The depot DDD for triptorelin is based on treatment of prostatic cancer
while the other DDD of 0.1 mg is based on the dose in one syringe used
in women undergoing controlled ovarian hyperstimulation.
L02AX Other hormones
L02B HORMONE ANTAGONISTS AND RELATED AGENTS

L02BA Anti-estrogens
L02BB Anti-androgens
L02BG Aromatase inhibitors
L02BX Other hormone antagonists and related agents
172
L03 IMMUNOSTIMULANTS
Immunosuppressants, see L04A.
L03A IMMUNOSTIMULANTS
Levamisole, which also affects the immune response, is classified in
P02CE.
L03AA Colony stimulating factors
The DDDs for pegfilgrastim (L03AA13) and lipegfilgrastim (L03AA14)
are based on the declared amount of filgrastim and on the use of one
single dose per cycle of chemotherapy. The DDDs for the other G-CSFs
are based on daily dosing for six subsequent days.
L03AB Interferons
Peginterferon alfa-2b in combination with ribavirin and peginterferon alfa-
2a in combination with ribavirin are classified in L03AB60 and L03AB61,
respectively.
The DDD for interferon alfa is based on the treatment of chronic active
hepatitis B, whilst the DDD for interferon beta is based on the
treatment of multiple sclerosis.
The DDDs of interferon beta-1a is based on i.m. administration.
L03AC Interleukins
The DDD for aldesleukin is based on the use of 5 vials (6.5 mg) per
treatment cycle of 33 days.
L03AX Other immunostimulants

The DDD for tasonermin is based on single dose treatment.
The DDD of 0.5 mg (P) for histamine dihydrochloride is based on the
total dose devided by days of first treatment cycle (42 days).
L04 IMMUNOSUPPRESSANTS
Immunosuppressants are defined as agents that completely or partly
suppress one or more factors in the immunosystem.
L04A IMMUNOSUPPRESSANTS
This group comprises immunosuppressants excl. corticosteroids.
173
The DDDs are based on prophylaxis of allograft transplant rejection if
this is an approved indication.
L04AA Selective immunosuppressants

Antilymphocyte immunoglobulin from horse serum is classified in
L04AA03.
Antithymocyte immunoglobulin from rabbit serum is classified in
L04AA04.
Oral formulations of cladribine used in multiple sclerosis are classified in
this group, while parenteral formulations for cancer are classified in
L01BB.
Oral formulations of sirolimus used in organ transplantation are classified
in this group, while parenteral formulations used for neoplastic diseases
are classified in L01EG.
Low strength products of ofatumumab used in the treatment of relapsing
multiple sclerosis (RMS) are classified in this group, while high strength
products for treatment of chronic lymphocytic leukaemia (CLL) are
classified in L01FA.
The DDD for muromonam-CD3 is based on combination therapy in

acute allograft rejection.
The DDDs for leflunomide, abatacept and tofacitinib are based on the
treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.
The DDDs for natalizumab, fingolimod, teriflunomide and
alemtuzumab are based on the treatment of multiple sclerosis.
The DDD for efalizumab is based on the treatment of psoriasis.
The DDD for eculizumab is based on the dose given in the maintenance
phase.
The DDDs for alemtuzumab and cladribine are based on the average
calculated daily dose in the first two years (year 1 and 2) when all
patients receive medication.
174
L04AB Tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNF-α) inhibitors
The DDDs for etanercept, infliximab and adalimumab are based on the
treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.
The DDD for cerolizumab pegol is based on the treatment of Crohn’s
Disease.
L04AC Interleukin inhibitors

Interleukin inhibitors used in asthma are classified in R03DX.
Dupilumab is classified in D11AH.
The DDDs for anakinra and tocilizumab are based on the treatment of
rheumatoid arthritis.
The DDD for daclizumab is based on the treatment of multiple
sclerosis.
The DDDs for ustekinumab, ixekizumab and brodalumab are based on
the treatment of psoriasis.
L04AD Calcineurin inhibitors

L04AX Other immunosuppressants
Oral formulations and prefilled syringe/pen of methotrexate are classified
in this group. Parenteral formulations used for neoplastic diseases are
classified in L01BA01.
Dimethyl fumarate indicated for multiple sclerosis or plaque psoriasis is
classified here.
The DDD for thalidomide is based on the treatment of lepra.
The DDD for lenalidomide is based on the treatment of myelodysplastic
syndromes.
The DDD for pomalidomide is based on the starting dose in the
treatment of multiple myeloma.
The DDDs for methotrexate are based on the treatment of rheumatoid
arthritis.
175
M MUSCULO-SKELETAL SYSTEM
M01 ANTIINFLAMMATORY AND ANTIRHEUMATIC PRODUCTS

A Antiinflammatory and antirheumatic products, non-steroids
B Antiinflammatory/antirheumatic agents in combination
C Specific antirheumatic agents
M02 TOPICAL PRODUCTS FOR JOINT AND MUSCULAR PAIN

A Topical products for joint and muscular pain
M03 MUSCLE RELAXANTS

A Muscle relaxants, peripherally acting agents
B Muscle relaxants, centrally acting agents
C Muscle relaxants, directly acting agents
M04 ANTIGOUT PREPARATIONS

A Antigout preparations
M05 DRUGS FOR TREATMENT OF BONE DISEASES

B Drugs affecting bone structure and mineralization
M09 OTHER DRUGS FOR DISORDERS OF THE MUSCULO-SKELETAL SYSTEM

A Other drugs for disorders of the musculo-skeletal system
176
M MUSCULO-SKELETAL SYSTEM
M01 ANTIINFLAMMATORY AND ANTIRHEUMATIC PRODUCTS
Corticosteroids, see H02 - Corticosteroids for systemic use.
M01A ANTIINFLAMMATORY AND ANTIRHEUMATIC PRODUCTS, NON-STEROIDS

This group comprises antiinflammatory and antirheumatic preparations
for systemic use.
The substances in this group have a broad range of indications, however,
they should be kept together in M01A.
NSAIDs in combination with paracetamol are classified in N02BE.
Disease Modifying Antirheumatic Drugs (DMARDs) see:
A07EC - Aminosalicylic acid and similar agents
L01BA - Folic acid analogues
L04AA - Selective immunosuppressants
L04AX - Other immunosuppressants
M01C - Specific antirheumatic agents
P01BA - Aminoquinolines
All preparations containing salicylic acid and derivatives are classified in
N02BA - Salicylic acid and derivatives, as it is difficult to differentiate
between use of salicylates in rheumatic conditions and other therapeutic
uses.
Exception: Salicylates in combination with corticosteroids are classified in
M01B.
Combinations of antiinflammatory/antirheumatic agents (e.g.
corticosteroids) are classified in M01B.
Combinations with muscle relaxants are classified in M03B.
Combinations with antibacterials are classified in J01.
Antiinflammatory or antirheumatic agents in combination with opioids are
classified in N02AJ - Opioids in combination with non-opioid analgesics.
Combined cold preparations with therapeutic levels of antiinflammatory
agents are classified in this group at separate 5th levels by using the 50-
series.
Combinations with drugs classified in A02B (e.g. esomeprazole) are
classified in M01A using the 50-series.
177
The DDDs are based on the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis, except
for the coxibs (M01AH).
M01AA Butylpyrazolidines
M01AB Acetic acid derivatives and related substances
M01AC Oxicams
Piroxicam and piroxicam-beta-cyclodextrin are given the same ATC 5th
level code M01AC01.
The DDD for meloxicam is based on the treatment of osteoarthritis.
M01AE Propionic acid derivatives

All plain ibuprofen preparations are classified in this group, even if they
are only intended for use as pain relief.
Combinations of ibuprofen and paracetamol are classified in N02BE51.
Ketoprofen lysine is classified at the same ATC 5th level as ketoprofen.
Ibuprofen lysine is classified at the same 5th level as ibuprofen.
M01AG Fenamates
Tolfenamic acid, used in the treatment of migraine, is classified here.
M01AH Coxibs
Celecoxib used in FAP (familiar adenomatous polyposis) is classified in
L01XX.
Combinations of celecoxib and amlodipine are classified in C08CA51.
The DDDs for the coxibs are based on the treatment of osteoarthritis.
M01AX Other antiinflammatory and antirheumatic agents, non-steroids

This group comprises antiinflammatory and antirheumatic drugs which
The DDD for glucosamine refers to glucosamine sulfate.
178
M01B ANTIINFLAMMATORY/ANTIRHEUMATIC AGENTS IN COMBINATION
M01BA Antiinflammatory/antirheumatic agents in combination with
corticosteroids
This group comprises antiinflammatory and antirheumatic drugs in
combination with corticosteroids.
Combinations with salicylic acid derivatives are classified in this group.
The preparations are classified at 5th levels according to the anti-
inflammatory/analgesic component. At each 5th level, different
corticosteroids may occur.
M01BX Other antiinflammatory/antirheumatic agents in combination with other
drugs
No 5th levels are established in this group. See comments regarding
specific combinations under M01A.
All combinations of different antiinflammatory agents (excl.
corticosteroids) are classified in this group.
M01C SPECIFIC ANTIRHEUMATIC AGENTS

This group comprises specific antirheumatic preparations.
Penicillamine, which is also used in conditions associated with impaired
copper metabolism and as an antidot in copper poisoning, is classified in
this group regardless of indication.
Other Disease Modifying Antirheumatic Drugs (DMARDs) see:
A07EC - Aminosalicylic acid and similar agents
L01BA - Folic acid analogues
L04AA - Selective immunosuppressants
L04AX - Other immunosuppressants
P01BA - Aminoquinolines
The DDDs are based on the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.
M01CA Quinolines
Chloroquine and hydroxychloroquine are classified as antimalaria agents
in P01BA.
M01CB Gold preparations
M01CC Penicillamine and similar agents
M01CX Other specific antirheumatic agents
179
M02 TOPICAL PRODUCTS FOR JOINT AND MUSCULAR PAIN
M02A TOPICAL PRODUCTS FOR JOINT AND MUSCULAR PAIN
This group comprises ointments, liniments, plasters, etc. which may
produce symptomatic relief in joint and muscular pain.
No DDDs have been assigned in this group.
M02AA Antiinflammatory preparations, non-steroids for topical use

All non-steroidal antiinflammatory derivatives for topical use are classified
here, regardless of indication. Exception is a product containing
diclofenac formulated as a 3% hyaluronic acid gel which is used in
treatment of actinic keratoses. This particular formulation is classified in
D11AX.
Combinations of non-steroidal antiinflammatory derivatives and other
substances for topical use are classified together with plain preparations
at the different 5th levels.
M02AB Capsaicin and similar agents
Capsaicin products indicated for the symptomatic treatment of peripheral
neuropathic pain (incl. postherpetic neuralgia) are classified in N01BX.
Combined preparations containing nonivamide used as a rubefacient are
classified in this group on a 4th level.
M02AC Preparations with salicylic acid derivatives
No separate 5th levels are established in this group.
Combinations of salicylic acid derivatives and other products are classified
in this group.
M02AX Other topical products for joint and muscular pain
This group comprises topical products, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
Preparations with menthol are generally classified in D04 - Antipruritics,
incl. antihistamines, anesthetics, etc.
180
M03 MUSCLE RELAXANTS
This group comprises peripherally, centrally and directly acting muscle
relaxants.
See also G04BD - Drugs for urinary frequency and incontinence.
M03A MUSCLE RELAXANTS, PERIPHERALLY ACTING AGENTS

This group comprises peripherally acting muscle relaxants such as curare
alkaloids and suxamethonium.
The drugs in this group are mainly used together with anesthetics.
As for other drugs used in general anesthesia (see N01A), no DDDs
have been established in this group because the doses used vary
substantially.
M03AA Curare alkaloids

M03AB Choline derivatives
M03AC Other quaternary ammonium compounds
Sugammadex indicated for reversal of neuromuscular blockade induced by
rocuronium or vecuronium is classified in V03AB - Antidotes.
M03AX Other muscle relaxants, peripherally acting agents
Botulinum toxin used e.g. for treatment of blepharospasm, hemifacial
spasm and migraine is classified in this group.
M03B MUSCLE RELAXANTS, CENTRALLY ACTING AGENTS

This group comprises centrally acting muscle relaxants. Combined
preparations are classified at separate 5th levels using the corresponding
50-series (comb. excl. psycholeptics), or the 70-series (comb. with
psycholeptics):
Combinations with NSAIDs (M01A), analgesics (N02B) or corticosteroids
(H02A) are classified here.
These drugs are used in different conditions associated with pain and
rigidity in the muscles, joints etc.
DDDs for combination products, see list on the website
www.whocc.no.
181
M03BA Carbamic acid esters
M03BB Oxazol, thiazine, and triazine derivatives
M03BC Ethers, chemically close to antihistamines
Orphenadrine citrate is classified here. Preparations containing
orphenadrine chloride are classified in N04AB.
Combinations with e.g. paracetamol are classified in this group at separate
5th levels by using the 50-series.
M03BX Other centrally acting agents
Baclofen indicated for reduction of alcohol consumption is classified here.
M03C MUSCLE RELAXANTS, DIRECTLY ACTING AGENTS

This group comprises agents acting directly on the muscles such as
dantrolene.
M03CA Dantrolene and derivatives
The DDD of dantrolene is based on the treatment of spasticity after
spinal injury.
M04 ANTIGOUT PREPARATIONS

M04A ANTIGOUT PREPARATIONS
The group is subdivided according to mode of action.
The DDDs are based on prophylaxis.
M04AA Preparations inhibiting uric acid production

Combinations of allupurinol and other antigout preparations are classified
here.
Rasburicase for the treatment of hyperuricemia is classified in V03AF.
M04AB Preparations increasing uric acid excretion
M04AC Preparations with no effect on uric acid metabolism
Colchinine indicated for the reduction of atherothrombotic events is also
classified in M04AC01.
182
M04AX Other antigout preparations
This group comprises preparations which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
M05 DRUGS FOR TREATMENT OF BONE DISEASES

Drugs used for the treatment of bone diseases, see also:
A11CC - Vitamin D and analogues
A12A - Calcium
A12AX - Calcium, combinations with vitamin D and/or other drugs
A12CD - Fluoride
G03C/G03F - Estrogens/Progestogens and estrogens in combination
H05BA - Calcitonins
M05B DRUGS AFFECTING BONE STRUCTURE AND MINERALIZATION

M05BA Bisphosphonates
This group includes plain preparations. Combination packages with
calcium for sequential use are classified in M05BB.
The DDDs for the bisphosphonates are based on the treatment of
osteoporosis if this is an approved indication.
The DDDs for clodronic acid, pamidronic acid, zoledronic acid,
parenteral etidronic acid and parenteral ibandronic acid are based on
tumor induced hypercalcemia. The oral DDD for ibandronic acid is
based on osteoporosis. Since the duration of the intravenous
treatment courses with the bisphosphonates are varying, from 1-5
days, the DDDs for these parenteral formulations are assigned
according to the total course dose. The DDDs for the oral formulations,
which are mainly used for maintenance therapy, are assigned
according to daily dosages.
The DDD for tiludronic acid is based on the treatment of Paget’s
disease.
M05BB Bisphosphonates, combinations

M05BC Bone morphogenetic proteins
M05BX Other drugs affecting bone structure and mineralization
The DDD for denosumab is based on the treatment of osteoporosis.
183
M09 OTHER DRUGS FOR DISORDERS OF THE MUSCULO-SKELETAL SYSTEM
M09A OTHER DRUGS FOR DISORDERS OF THE MUSCULO-SKELETAL SYSTEM
This group comprises preparations used in disorders of the musculo-
skeletal system, which cannot be classified in the preceding groups.
M09AA Quinine and derivatives
Hydroquinine, which is used in the treatment of nocturnal leg cramps is
Quinine is classified as an antimalaria agent in P01BC. Quinine in
combination with psycholeptics is classified in M09AA72, since these
combinations are used for treatment of nocturnal leg cramps.
Combinations used for cold conditions, containing quinine as an
antipyretic, are classified in R05X.
M09AB Enzymes
All enzyme preparations, which are used to treat inflammatory conditions
in the musculo-skeletal system, are classified in this group.
M09AX Other drugs for disorders of the musculo-skeletal system
Hyaluronic acid injection for intraarticular administration
(e.g. 2.5 mg/ampoule) used in the treatment of arthritis is classified in this
group. Hyaluronic acid injection used during surgical procedures on the
eye (e.g. 4-20 mg/ampoule) is classified in S01K.
Mexiletine indicated for myotonic disorders is classified in C01BB.
The DDD for hyaluronic acid is based on intraarticular treatment of
arthritis. The DDD is assigned according to daily dose even if the
product is given as weekly injections.
184
N NERVOUS SYSTEM
N01 ANESTHETICS
A Anesthetics, general
B Anesthetics, local
N02 ANALGESICS
A Opioids
B Other analgesics and antipyretics
C Antimigraine preparations
N03 ANTIEPILEPTICS
A Antiepileptics
N04 ANTI-PARKINSON DRUGS

A Anticholinergic agents
B Dopaminergic agents
N05 PSYCHOLEPTICS
A Antipsychotics
B Anxiolytics
C Hypnotics and sedatives
N06 PSYCHOANALEPTICS
A Antidepressants
B Psychostimulants, agents used for ADHD and nootropics
C Psycholeptics and psychoanaleptics in combination
D Anti-dementia drugs
N07 OTHER NERVOUS SYSTEM DRUGS

A Parasympathomimetics
B Drugs used in addictive disorders
C Antivertigo preparations
X Other nervous system drugs
185
N NERVOUS SYSTEM
N01 ANESTHETICS
No DDDs have been established in this group because the doses used
vary substantially.
N01A ANESTHETICS, GENERAL

This group comprises agents which produce general anesthesia, surgical
analgesia or neuroleptanalgesia. See also M03A - Peripherally acting
muscle relaxants.
Benzodiazepine derivatives are classified in N05BA or N05CD.
N01AA Ethers
N01AB Halogenated hydrocarbons
N01AF Barbiturates, plain
This group comprises barbiturates used as anesthetics.
Barbiturates used as hypnotics/sedatives and as premedication, see
N05CA - Barbiturates, plain.
N01AG Barbiturates in combination with other drugs
Only preparations used as anesthetics are classified in this group. See also
N05CB - Barbiturates, combinations.
N01AH Opioid anesthetics
Opioid anesthetics in combination with other anesthetics are classified in
this group at separate 5th levels using the corresponding 50-series.
Transdermal, nasal and sublingual formulations of fentanyl are classified in
N02AB.
Fentanyl in combination with bupivacaine for e.g. postoperative pain is
classified in N01AH51 - fentanyl, combinations.
N01AX Other general anesthetics
This group comprises various plain and combined drugs used to produce
anesthesia/analgesia, which cannot be classified in the preceeding groups.
Esketamine for nasal administration is classified in N06AX.
186
N01B ANESTHETICS, LOCAL
Local anesthetics in this context mean anesthetics which only affect a local
area as opposed to general anesthetics affecting the entire body.
Creams, plasters and sprays containing e.g. lidocaine or prilocaine used as
anesthetics/analgesics or in premature ejaculation are classified in N01BB.
Local anesthetics for dermatological use such as treatment of pruritus,
minor burns and insect stings are classified in D04AB - Anesthetics for
topical use.
Antihemorrhoidals containing anesthetics, see C05AD - Local anesthetics.
Stomatologicals with anesthetics, see A01AD.
Combinations of corticosteroids and anesthetics for oral local treatment,
see A01AC.
Throat preparations with anesthetics, see R02AD - Anesthetics, local.
Ophthalmological anesthetics, see S01HA.
Combinations with e.g. epinephrine are classified at separate 5th levels by
N01BA Esters of aminobenzoic acid
Plasters and creams containing lidocaine and tetracaine are classified in
N01BB52.
Combinations of tetracaine and oxymetazoline for nasal application used
as local dental anesthetics are classified in N01BA53.
N01BB Amides
Lidocaine injections used as antiarrhythmics are classified in C01BB.
N01BC Esters of benzoic acid
Cocaine nasal solution for induction of local anesthesia of the mucous
membranes through the nasal cavities is classified here.
N01BX Other local anesthetics
Capsaicin products indicated for the symptomatic treatment of peripheral
neuropathic pain (incl. postherpetic neuralgia) are classified in N01BX. See
also M02AB.
187
N02 ANALGESICS
This group comprises general analgesics and antipyretics.
All salicylic acid derivatives except combinations with corticosteroids
(M01B) or opioids (N02AJ) are classified in N02BA - Salicylic acid and
derivatives, as it is difficult to differentiate between the use of salicylates
in rheumatic conditions and other therapeutic uses of salicylates.
All plain ibuprofen preparations are classified in M01A, even if they are
only intended for use as pain relief.
There are a number of combined preparations, which contain analgesics
and psycholeptics. These are classified in N02, as pain relief must be
regarded as the main indication. Analgesics used for specific indications
are classified in the respective ATC groups. E.g.:
A03D/
A03EA- Antispasmodic/psycholeptics/analgesic combinations
M01 - Antiinflammatory and antirheumatic products
M02A - Topical products for joint and muscular pain
M03 - Muscle relaxants
See comments to these groups.
Lidocaine indicated for postherpetic pain is classified in N01BB.
N02A OPIOIDS
This group comprises strong analgesics of the opiate type and analgesics
with similar structure or action.
Sufentanil, which is also used as an epidural analgesic or in postoperative
pain, is classified in N01AH.
Fentanyl in combination with bupivacaine used in e.g. postoperative pain
is classified in N01AH51 - fentanyl, combinations.
Combinations with antispasmodics are classified in N02AG.
The DDDs in this group are based on the treatment of pain.
The DDD for oral morphine is higher than the parenteral DDD because
of lower bioavailability.
188
N02AA Natural opium alkaloids
This group includes natural and semi-synthetic opiates.
All plain morphine preparations are classified in this group.
Opium, see also A07DA - Antipropulsives.
Plain codeine preparations are classified in R05D - Cough suppressants,
excl. combinations with expectorants, while dihydrocodeine is classified in
N02AA. Codeine or dihydrocodeine in combination with other analgesics
or NSAIDs are classified in N02AJ - Opioids in combination with non-opioid
analgesics.
Other combinations with e.g. caffeine, antihistamines and anticholinergic
agents are classified in N02AA. Combinations of codeine with
psycholeptics are classified in N02AA79.
The DDDs are based on approved dose recommendations.
When establishing DDDs for combination products in the 50-series, all
analgesic components are taken into consideration.
The DDD, expressed in UD, should normally not exceed the approved
dose recommendations for any of the components.
N02AB Phenylpiperidine derivatives

Fentanyl patches are classified in this group whereas parenteral
formulations are classified in N01AH.
The transdermal DDD for fentanyl is based on the amount delivered per
24 hours.
N02AC Diphenylpropylamine derivatives

Methadone, levomethadone and levacetylmethadol are classified in
N07BC - Drugs used in opioid dependence.
Dextropropoxyphene in combination with a muscle relaxant is classified in
M03B.
Different DDDs are assigned for different dextropropoxyphene salts
based on their different solubility.
N02AD Benzomorphan derivatives
189
N02AE Oripavine derivatives
High strength formulations (above 0.4 mg) of buprenorphine used in
opioid dependence are classified in N07BC.
N02AF Morphinan derivatives
N02AG Opioids in combination with antispasmodics
Preparations are classified at 5th levels according to the analgesic. At
each level different antispasmodics may occur.
The DDDs in this group are as far as possible equipotent to the DDD for
parenteral morphine.
N02AJ Opioids in combination with non-opioid analgesics

Includes combinations with opioids and other non-opioid analgesics (e.g.
paracetamol, acetylsalicylic acid or NSAIDs). At each 5th level other active
ingredients such as e.g. caffeine, vitamins and antihistamines are allowed.
Various combinations of codeine with other analgesics are included in
N02AJ09 - codeine and other non-opioid analgesics. For example
combinations containing three analgesic components (codeine,
paracetamol and ibuprofen) are classified in N02AJ09.
Various combinations of tramadol with other analgesics are included in
N02AJ15 - tramadol and other non-opioid analgesics. For example
combinations containing tramadol and ibuprofen (or ketorolac or
diclofenac) are classified in N02AJ15.
Combinations of codeine, non-opioid analgesics and psycholeptics are
classified in N02AA79 - codeine, combinations with psycholeptics. Other
analgesics may be included in the 70-series codes.
All plain and combination products containing dextropropoxyphen are
classified in N02AC.
When establishing DDDs for combination products all analgesic
components are taken into consideration.
The DDD, expressed in UD, should normally not exceed the approved
dose recommendations for any of the components.
190
N02AX Other opioids
The group comprises opioids, which cannot be classified in the preceding
groups.
N02B OTHER ANALGESICS AND ANTIPYRETICS

See general considerations under N02.
Combinations with opioids should be classified in N02AJ - Opioids in
combination with non-opioid analgesics. Combinations with codeine, non-
opioid analgesics and psycholeptics are classified in N02AA79.
Combinations with opioids and antispasmodics are classified in
N02AG - Opioids in combination with antispasmodics.
Combinations with muscle relaxants are classified in M03B.
Combined preparations which contain more than one analgesic, should be
classified by using the following ranking:
1. Phenacetin
2. Bucetin
3. Dipyrocetyl
4. Paracetamol
5. Acetylsalicylic acid
6. Phenazone
7. Salicylamide
8. Propyphenazone
This means that a product containing paracetamol and phenazone should
be classified in N02BE51 - paracetamol, combinations excl. psycholeptics
and not in N02BB51 - phenazone, combinations excl. psycholeptics.
Dextropropoxyphene plain, and in combination with other analgesics, is
classified in N02AC.
Cold preparations with therapeutic levels of analgesics are classified in this
group at separate 5th levels by using the 50-series.
Preparations are subdivided on 4th levels according to chemical structure.
Combinations with ascorbic acid (i.e. 50 mg or more per unit dose) are
classified at separate 5th levels using the corresponding 50-series.
Products containing less than 50 mg per unit dose are classified at the
plain level of the analgesic component.
191
When establishing DDDs for combination products in the 50-series, all
analgesic components are taken into consideration.
The DDD expressed in UD, should normally not exceed the approved
dose recommendations for any of the components. See list of DDDs for
combinations products, www.whocc.no.
N02BA Salicylic acid and derivatives

All salicylic acid derivatives including some commonly regarded as non-
steroid antiinflammatory drugs, e.g. diflunisal, are classified in this group.
See comment under N02 - Analgesics.
Salicylic acid derivatives in combination with corticosteroids are classified
in M01B. Acetylsalicylic acid preparations specifically intended for use as
antithrombotic agents are classified in B01AC.
Lysine acetylsalicylate is classified at the same 5th level as acetylsalicylic
acid.
Combinations with antiemetics are classified here.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of pain and not on use in
rheumatic diseases.
DDDs for combined preparations, see N02B.
N02BB Pyrazolones
N02BE Anilides
Propacetamol, a prodrug of paracetamol is classified at a separate ATC 5th
level in this group.
Benorilate, which is an ester of acetylsalicylic acid and paracetamol, is
classified in N02BA.
Combinations of paracetamol and e.g. ibuprofen are classified in N02BE51.
Paracetamol in combination with orphenadrine (citrate) is classified in
M03BC.
N02BF Gabapentinoids
N02BG Other analgesics and antipyretics
This group comprises analgesics, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
192
The DDD for ziconotide is based on intrathecal administration.
DDDs established for products classified in N02BG10 - cannabinoids are
available on the list of DDDs for combinations on the website
www.whocc.no.
N02C ANTIMIGRAINE PREPARATIONS

This group comprises preparations specifically used in the prophylaxis and
treatment of migraine. Analgesics, see N02A and N02B.
Beta blocking agents, see C07.
Antivertigo preparations, see N07.
Cyproheptadine, see R06A - Antihistamines for systemic use.
Tolfenamic acid, see M01AG - Fenamates.
Indometacin in combination with prochlorperazine and caffeine is
classified in M01AB51 - Indometacin, combinations.
Botulinum toxin used in the prophylactic treatment of migraine is
classified in M03AX01.
N02CA Ergot alkaloids
Ergot alkaloids for gynecological use, see G02A and G02CB.
See also C04AE - Ergot alkaloids.
Dihydroergotamine, which is also used in the treatment of hypotension, is
Combinations of dihydroergotamine and etilefrine are classified in C01CA.
The DDD for ergotamine is based on the treatment of acute migraine
attacks, whereas the DDDs for dihydroergotamine and methysergide
are based on prophylaxis.
The DDD for dihydroergotamine nasal spray is based on the treatment
of acute migraine attacks.
N02CB Corticosteroid derivatives

The DDDs for corticosteroid derivatives are based on prophylaxis of
migraine.
193
N02CC Selective serotonin (5HT1) agonists
The DDDs for the selective serotonin (5HT1) agonists are based on the
recommended initial dose in acute attacks of migraine.
N02CD Calcitonin gene-related peptide (CGRP) antagonists

The DDDs for the CGRP antagonists are based on the prophylaxis of
migraine.
N02CX Other antimigraine preparations

This group comprises antimigraine preparations, which cannot be
Clonidine low strength tablets (e.g. 25 mcg) are classified here, even if the
indication also may be “opioid withdrawal symptoms”.
The DDDs for the substances in this group are based on the prophylaxis
of migraine.
N03 ANTIEPILEPTICS
N03A ANTIEPILEPTICS
This group comprises preparations used in the treatment of epilepsy.
Combined preparations are classified at separate 5th levels using the
corresponding 50-series.
The DDDs for the antiepileptics are based on combination therapy.
N03AA Barbiturates and derivatives

Barbiturates used mainly as hypnotics/sedatives are classified in N05C -
Hypnotics and sedatives.
Phenobarbital, which is used both as an antiepileptic and as a sedative, is
Combinations with phenytoin are classified in N03AB.
N03AB Hydantoin derivatives
Combinations of phenytoin and barbiturates are classified in this group.
N03AC Oxazolidine derivatives
N03AD Succinimide derivatives
194
N03AE Benzodiazepine derivatives
Clonazepam is classified in this group.
All other benzodiazepines are classified as anxiolytics in N05B (e.g.
diazepam) or hypnotics/sedatives in N05C (e.g. midazolam).
N03AF Carboxamide derivatives
N03AG Fatty acid derivatives
N03AX Other antiepileptics
This group comprises antiepileptics, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
Fenfluramine indicated for the treatment of seizures associated with
Dravet syndrome is classified here.
Gabapentin and pregabalin are classified in N02BF Gabapentinoids.
The DDDs for stiripentol and fenfluramine are based on the treatment
of children with a bodyweight of 20 kg.
N04 ANTI-PARKINSON DRUGS

This group comprises preparations used in the treatment of Parkinson's
disease and related conditions, including drug-induced parkinsonism.
The DDDs are based on recommended doses for the long-term
treatment of symptoms of Parkinson's disease.
No separate DDDs are established for oral depot formulations.
N04A ANTICHOLINERGIC AGENTS

N04AA Tertiary amines
N04AB Ethers chemically close to antihistamines
Orphenadrine chloride is classified in this group, while orphenadrine
citrate is classified in M03BC.
N04AC Ethers of tropine or tropine derivatives
N04B DOPAMINERGIC AGENTS

N04BA Dopa and dopa derivatives
Combinations with decarboxylase inhibitors and other dopaminergic
agents are classified here.
195
The DDD for the combination of levodopa and decarboxylase inhibitor
is based on the content of levodopa, see ATC index.
N04BB Adamantane derivatives

N04BC Dopamine agonists
Bromocriptine used in parkinsonism is classified in this group (e.g. tablets
of 5 mg and 10 mg). Low strength bromocriptine tablets (e.g. 2.5 mg)
used as a prolactine inhibitor are classified in G02CB - Prolactine
inhibitors.
Cabergoline used in parkinsonism is classified in this group (e.g. tablets of
1 mg). Low strength cabergoline tablets (0.5 mg) used as a prolactine
inhibitor are classified in G02CB.
Lisuride in high strength formulations (e.g. 0.2 mg tablets), which is also
used in the treatment of Parkinsonism, are classified in G02CB while
lisuride in low strength formulations (e.g. 25 mcg tablets) are classified in
N02CA.
N04BD Monoamine oxidase B inhibitors
N04BX Other dopaminergic agents
This group comprises dopaminergic agents which cannot be classified in
the preceding groups.
The combination of levodopa, decarboxylase inhibitor and COMT inhibitor
is classified in N04BA - Dopa and dopa derivatives.
N04C OTHER ANTIPARKINSON DRUGS

N04CX Other antiparkinson drugs
N05 PSYCHOLEPTICS
The group is divided into therapeutic subgroups:
N05A - Antipsychotics
N05B - Anxiolytics
N05C - Hypnotics and sedatives
N05A ANTIPSYCHOTICS
This group comprises drugs with antipsychotic actions (i.e. neuroleptics).
Reserpine is classified in C02 - Antihypertensives.
196
Antipsychotics in combination with antidepressants are classified in N06C -
Psycholeptics and psychoanaleptics in combination.
The group is subdivided mainly according to chemical structure.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of psychosis. The substances in

this group are sometimes used for other indications in much lower
doses.
For depot injections, the DDDs are based on the average
recommended doses divided by the dosing interval.
N05AA Phenothiazines with aliphatic side-chain

N05AB Phenothiazines with piperazine structure
N05AC Phenothiazines with piperidine structure
N05AD Butyrophenone derivatives
The DDD for parenteral droperidol is based on treatment of post-
operative nausea and vomiting.
N05AE Indole derivatives

Isoindoles are classified here.
N05AF Thioxanthene derivatives
N05AG Diphenylbutylpiperidine derivatives
N05AH Diazepines, oxazepines, thiazepines and oxepines
N05AL Benzamides
Levosulpiride used as a propulsive is classified in this group.
N05AN Lithium
The DDD is based on the prophylaxis of mania or depression.
Antidepressants, see N06A.

N05AX Other antipsychotics
This group comprises antipsychotics which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
197
N05B ANXIOLYTICS
This group comprises preparations used in the treatment of neuroses and
psychosomatic disorders associated with anxiety and tension, e.g.
benzodiazepines.
See also:
N05C - Hypnotics and sedatives
Usually the presence of an anxiolytic (or other psycholeptics) in combined
preparations must be regarded as being of secondary importance and the
preparations should be classified in the respective therapeutic groups (e.g.
A03C - Antispasmodics in combination with psycholeptics, N02 -
Analgesics).
Combined preparations used mainly for the treatment of anxiety are
The DDDs are based on the treatment of anxiety.
N05BA Benzodiazepine derivatives

Benzodiazepines used mainly in the treatment of sleep disturbances are
classified in N05C - Hypnotics and sedatives.
Clonazepam used in the treatment of epilepsy is classified in N03 -
Antiepileptics.
The parenteral DDD for chlordiazepoxide is higher than the oral DDD
due to lower bioavailability for intramuscular injections.
N05BB Diphenylmethane derivatives

N05BC Carbamates
N05BD Dibenzo-bicyclo-octadiene derivatives
N05BE Azaspirodecanedione derivatives
N05BX Other anxiolytics
This group comprises anxiolytics which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
198
N05C HYPNOTICS AND SEDATIVES
This group comprises preparations with mainly sedative or hypnotic
actions.
Melatonin receptor agonists are also classified in this group.
See also:
N05B - Anxiolytics
R06A - Antihistamines for systemic use
Combined preparations are classified at separate 4th levels, N05CB and
N05CX.
Regarding classification of combined preparations, see comments under
N05B - Anxiolytics.
Combined preparations with barbiturates are mainly classified in A03
(mainly antispasmodic effect) or in N02 (mainly analgesic effect).
Combined preparations with barbiturates which remain in N05C are
mainly "neurostabilizers".
The DDDs are based on use of the drugs as hypnotics.
The DDD for melatonin is based on dose recommendations in EU for
the 2 mg depot tablet.
N05CA Barbiturates, plain

This group comprises barbiturates used for insomnia.
Preparations used as premedication are also classified in this group.
Barbiturates used in general anesthesia are classified in N01A - General
anesthetics.
Barbiturates used mainly in the treatment of epilepsy, e.g. phenobarbital,
are classified in N03 - Antiepileptics.
Combined preparations are classified in N05CB, see comment under N05C.
N05CB Barbiturates, combinations
This group comprises combined preparations with mainly sedative action.
Combinations with analgesics etc., see comments under N05C - Hypnotics
and sedatives.
Tetrabamate is classified here.
199
N05CC Aldehydes and derivatives
N05CD Benzodiazepine derivatives
Benzodiazepine derivatives used mainly in sleeping disorders are classified
in this group.
All midazolam medicinal products are classified here.
See also N05BA.
The DDDs for nasal and sublingual formulations (oromucosal
administration) of midazolam are based on acute treatment of seizures
in patients with epilepsy.
N05CE Piperidinedione derivatives

N05CF Benzodiazepine related drugs
N05CH Melatonin receptor agonists
The DDD for melatonin is based on dose recommendations for the
2 mg depot tablet approved in Europe.
N05CM Other hypnotics and sedatives

This group includes drugs, which cannot be classified in the preceding
groups.
N05CX Hypnotics and sedatives in combination, excl. barbiturates
All combination products mainly used in sleeping disorders are classified in
this group, except combinations with barbiturates, see N05CB.
N06 PSYCHOANALEPTICS
This group comprises antidepressants, psychostimulants, nootropics anti-
dementia drugs and combinations with psycholeptics.
Antiobesity preparations are classified in A08 - Antiobesity preparations,
excl. diet products.
N06A ANTIDEPRESSANTS
This group comprises preparations used in the treatment of endogenous
and exogenous depressions.
The group is subdivided mainly according to mode of action. The various
antidepressants have different modes of action, and the classification will
not reflect the exact mode of action of the various antidepressants.
200
Lithium, see N05AN - Lithium
Combination with psycholeptics, see N06C.
The DDDs are based on treatment of moderately severe depressions.
N06AA Non-selective monoamine reuptake inhibitors

N06AB Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors
N06AF Monoamine oxidase inhibitors, non-selective
N06AG Monoamine oxidase A inhibitors
N06AX Other antidepressants
This group includes antidepressants, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
Esketamine for nasal administration is classified here, while injections are
classified in N01AX.
N06B PSYCHOSTIMULANTS, AGENTS USED FOR ADHD AND NOOTROPICS

Some drugs used in the treatment of narcolepsy are classified here.
Nootropics are classified in N06BX.
Clonidine and guanfacine also used in ADHD are classified in C02AC.
N06BA Centrally acting sympathomimetics
Amfetamine is classified in this group, see comment under A08AA -
Centrally acting antiobesity products.
Combinations of amfetamine and dexamfetamine are classified in
N06BA01.
N06BC Xanthine derivatives
Caffeine in combination with respiratory stimulants is classified in R07AB.
N06BX Other psychostimulants and nootropics
This group comprises substances regarded as nootropics.
Psychostimulants, which cannot be classified in the preceding groups, are
also classified here.
Cyprodenate (deanol cyclohexylpropionate) is classified in N06BX04.
The DDD for idebenone is based on treatment of Leber’s hereditary
optic neuropathy.
201
N06C PSYCHOLEPTICS AND PSYCHOANALEPTICS IN COMBINATION
Combinations of e.g. antidepressants and anxiolytics are classified in this
group.
N06CA Antidepressants in combination with psycholeptics
Preparations are classified at 5th levels according to the antidepressant.
At each level various psycholeptics may occur.
N06CB Psychostimulants in combination with psycholeptics
N06D ANTI-DEMENTIA DRUGS

N06DA Anticholinesterases
N06DX Other anti-dementia drugs
N07 OTHER NERVOUS SYSTEM DRUGS

This group comprises other nervous system drugs, which cannot be
classified in the preceding 2nd levels in ATC group N.
N07A PARASYMPATHOMIMETICS
See also cholinergics used in glaucoma therapy, S01EB.
This group includes various drugs used for different indications. The
DDDs are therefore established individually for each ATC 5th level.
N07AA Anticholinesterases
N07AB Choline esters
N07AX Other parasympathomimetics
N07B DRUGS USED IN ADDICTIVE DISORDERS

This group comprises drugs used for maintenance treatment of addictive
disorders. Drugs used for detoxification are classified in V03A - All other
therapeutic products.
N07BA Drugs used in nicotine dependence
Bupropion is classified in N06A - Antidepressants.
The DDD for chewing gum and lozenges is identical.
202
N07BB Drugs used in alcohol dependence
Naltrexone, which is also used in the treatment of opioid dependence, see
N07BC, is classified in this group.
The DDD for nalmefene is based on the recommended dose on
treatment days.
N07BC Drugs used in opioid dependence

Low strength formulations of buprenorphine (equal or less than 0.4 mg)
are classified in N02AE. Naltrexone is classified in N07BB - Drugs used in
alcohol dependence.
Combinations of buprenorphine and naloxone are classified here.
Morphine used for treatment of opioid dependence is classified in
N02AA01.
N07C ANTIVERTIGO PREPARATIONS

This group comprises agents mainly used in the treatment of vertigo.
See also:
A04A - Antiemetics and antinauseants
C04AX - Other peripheral vasodilators
N02C - Antimigraine preparations
R06A - Antihistamines for systemic use
The DDDs are based on treatment of vestibular symptoms.
N07CA Antivertigo preparations

Cinnarizine in combination with diphenhydramine teoclate or
dihydroergcristine are classified in N07CA52.
The DDD for the N07CA52 refers to cinnarizine and is based on the
combination of cinnarizine and diphenhydramine teoclate.
N07X OTHER NERVOUS SYSTEM DRUGS

N07XA Gangliosides and ganglioside derivatives
N07XX Other nervous system drugs
This group contains substances, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
Combinations of metenkefalin and tridecactide is classified in N07XX (no
203
ATC 5th level).
Combinations of dextromethorphan and quinidine are classified in
N07XX59.
Dimethyl fumarate indicated for multiple sclerosis or plaque psoriasis is
classified in L04AX.
All products containing tafamidis, regardless of indication, are classified
here.
Calcium, magnesium and potassium salts of oxybate are classified in
N07XX04 - sodium oxybate.
The DDD for tafamidis is based on treatment of nerve damage caused
by transthyretin amyloidosis.
204
P ANTIPARASITIC PRODUCTS, INSECTICIDES AND REPELLENTS
P01 ANTIPROTOZOALS
A Agents against amoebiasis and other protozoal diseases
B Antimalarials
C Agents against leishmaniasis and trypanosomiasis
P02 ANTHELMINTICS
B Antitrematodals
C Antinematodal agents
D Anticestodals
P03 ECTOPARASITICIDES, INCL. SCABICIDES, INSECTICIDES AND REPELLENTS

A Ectoparasiticides, incl. scabicides
B Insecticides and repellents
205
P ANTIPARASITIC PRODUCTS, INSECTICIDES AND REPELLENTS
The group is subdivided according to types of parasites.
P01 ANTIPROTOZOALS
P01A AGENTS AGAINST AMOEBIASIS AND OTHER PROTOZOAL DISEASES
This group comprises drugs mainly used for amoeba infections and other
protozoal diseases such as giardiasis and trichomoniasis.
P01AA Hydroxyquinoline derivatives
All combined preparations containing clioquinol are classified in this
group. Formulations of chlorquinaldol and clioquinol for dermatological
use are classified in D08AH.
P01AB Nitroimidazole derivatives

Nitroimidazole derivatives used for amoebiasis, trichomoniasis and
giardiasis are classified in this group. Formulations for vaginal
administration are classified in G01AF. Parenteral formulations mainly
used for treatment of anaerobic bacterial infections are classified in
J01XD. Fixed combination packages for eradication of Helicobacter pylori
are classified in A02BD.
Combinations with antibacterials are classified in J01R.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of amoebiasis, giardiasis and
trichomoniasis. The duration of the treatment periods is not taken into
consideration.
P01AC Dichloroacetamide derivatives

This group comprises luminal amoebicides.
The DDDs in this group are based on treatment of luminal amoebiasis.
P01AR Arsenic compounds

This group comprises e.g. glycobiarsol. Combinations containing
clioquinol are classified in P01AA.
P01AX Other agents against amoebiasis and other protozoal diseases
This group comprises agents, which cannot be classified in the preceding
groups. Combinations with clioquinol are classified in P01AA.
206
P01B ANTIMALARIALS
This group comprises drugs mainly used for treatment and prophylaxis of
malaria.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of malaria, except for proguanil,
which is used for prophylaxis only. For some substances the DDDs are
expressed as amount of base. These are indicated in the ATC index.
P01BA Aminoquinolines
Combinations with clioquinol are classified in P01AA. Combinations with
glycobiarsol are classified in P01AR.
The DDDs are based on the average daily dose for the treatment
period.
P01BB Biguanides
The DDD for proguanil is based on the daily dose given for prophylaxis
of malaria. The DDD for the fixed combination of proguanil and
atovaquone is based on the treatment of acute malaria, while the DDD
for the fixed combination of proguanil and chloroquine is based on
prophylaxis of malaria, see list of DDDs for combination products
www.whocc.no.
P01BC Methanolquinolines
Combined preparations with quinine and psycholeptics used for treatment
of nocturnal cramps are classified in M09AA.
Combined preparations with quinine for symptomatic relief in cold
conditions are classified in R05X.
Hydroquinine is classified in M09AA.
P01BD Diaminopyrimidines
The DDD for pyrimethamine is based on combination therapy with a
sulphonamide for the treatment of malaria.
P01BE Artemisinin and derivatives, plain

The parenteral DDD for arthemether is based on monotherapy.
The DDDs for artemisinin derivatives are based on combination therapy
with other antimalarials.
207
P01BF Artemisinin and derivatives, combinations
P01BX Other antimalarials
groups. Combinations of diphenhydramine and diethyltoluamide are
classified at the plain level for diphenhydramine in D04AA.
The DDD for halofantrine is based on a one-day (12h) treatment.
P01C AGENTS AGAINST LEISHMANIASIS AND TRYPANOSOMIASIS

P01CA Nitroimidazole derivatives
Nitroimidazole derivatives used for trypanosomiasis are classified in this
group. Other nitroimidazole derivatives, see P01AB.
The DDD for benznidazole is based on the treatment of
trypanosomiasis.
The DDD for fexinidazole is based on the average daily dose for the
total 10 days course.
P01CB Antimony compounds

The DDDs are expressed as pentavalent antimony (Sb5+) used in the
treatment of visceral leishmaniasis.
P01CC Nitrofuran derivatives

The DDDs are based on the treatment of trypanosomiasis.
P01CD Arsenic compounds

The DDDs are based on the treatment of trypanosomiasis.
P01CX Other agents against leishmaniasis and trypanosomiasis

groups.
The DDD for pentamidine isethionate is based on amount given per
injection. The DDD for suramin sodium is based on the average daily
dose for the treatment period.
208
P02 ANTHELMINTICS
The anthelmintics are subdivided according to the main type of worms
(i.e. trematodes, nematodes and cestodes) causing the infections.
P02B ANTITREMATODALS
This group comprises drugs mainly used for trematode infections such as
e.g. schistosomiasis. Niclosamide, which is also used in trematode
infections, is classified in P02DA.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of schistosomiasis.
P02BA Quinoline derivatives and related substances

P02BB Organophosphorous compounds
Metrifonate is administered every second week. The DDD is the dose
divided by the dosing interval.
P02BX Other antitrematodal agents

groups.
P02C ANTINEMATODAL AGENTS

This group comprises drugs mainly used for nematode infections.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of different nematode infections
e.g. ascariasis (roundworm) and hookworm infections.
P02CA Benzimidazole derivatives

P02CB Piperazine and derivatives
E.g. diethylcarbamazine is classified in this group.
The DDD for diethylcarbamazine is based on the treatment of
lymphatic filiariasis.
P02CC Tetrahydropyrimidine derivatives

P02CE Imidazothiazole derivatives
P02CF Avermectines
209
P02CX Other antinematodals
groups.
P02D ANTICESTODALS
This group comprises drugs mainly used for cestode infections.
Praziquantel and mebendazole which are also used in cestode infections,
are classified in P02BA and P02CA respectively.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of cestode (tapeworm)
infections.
P02DA Salicylic acid derivatives

P02DX Other anticestodals
groups.
P03 ECTOPARASITICIDES, INCL. SCABICIDES, INSECTICIDES AND REPELLENTS

No DDDs are assigned in this group. Substances classified in this group
are for topical use and the consumption figures for these preparations
could be expressed in e.g. grams of preparations regardless of
strength.
P03A ECTOPARASITICIDES, INCL. SCABICIDES

This group comprises preparations used against scabies, lice and other
ectoparasites.
The active substances with direct effect on the ectoparasiticides are
decisive for the classification.
P03AA Sulfur containing products
Combinations with e.g. benzyl benzoate are classified in this group.
Combinations with chlorine compounds, see P03AB. If sulfur is the only
substance with direct effect, the product is classified in P03AA.
P03AB Chlorine containing products
Combinations with sulfur compounds are classified in this group.
210
P03AC Pyrethrines, incl. synthetic compounds
This group comprises various pyrethrum products, including synthetic
pyrethrinoids and combinations with e.g. piperonyl butoxide.
Combinations with malathion are classified here.
P03AX Other ectoparasiticides, incl. scabicides
Crotamiton preparations are classified in D04AX - Other antipruritics.
Combinations of benzyl benzoate and sulfur containing compounds are
classified in P03AA.
Dimeticone used as antiflatulent is classified in A03AX13 - silicones.
P03B INSECTICIDES AND REPELLENTS

P03BA Pyrethrines
P03BX Other insecticides and repellents
211
R RESPIRATORY SYSTEM
R01 NASAL PREPARATIONS

A Decongestants and other nasal preparations for topical use
B Nasal decongestants for systemic use
R02 THROAT PREPARATIONS

A Throat preparations
R03 DRUGS FOR OBSTRUCTIVE AIRWAY DISEASES

A Adrenergics, inhalants
B Other drugs for obstructive airway diseases, inhalants
C Adrenergics for systemic use
D Other systemic drugs for obstructive airway diseases
R05 COUGH AND COLD PREPARATIONS

C Expectorants, excl. combinations with cough suppressants
D Cough suppressants, excl. combinations with expectorants
F Cough suppressants and expectorants, combinations
X Other cold preparations
R06 ANTIHISTAMINES FOR SYSTEMIC USE

A Antihistamines for systemic use
R07 OTHER RESPIRATORY SYSTEM PRODUCTS

A Other respiratory system products
212
R RESPIRATORY SYSTEM
Inhaled antiinfectives are classified in ATC group J - Antiinfectives for
systemic use.
R01 NASAL PREPARATIONS

Varenicline nasal spray used for dry eye disease is classified in S01XA.
R01A DECONGESTANTS AND OTHER NASAL PREPARATIONS FOR TOPICAL USE
This group comprises preparations for local treatment in nasal congestion
(e.g. sympathomimetics) or for prophylaxis and treatment of allergic
rhinitis (e.g. corticosteroids, cromoglicate preparations). Most of the
products are nasal drops, nasal sprays or nasal inhalants. Formulations
approved for eye, ear and nose are classified in S03.
See also R01B - Nasal decongestants for systemic use, and
R06 - Antihistamines for systemic use.
The DDDs are based on treatment of both nostrils.
R01AA Sympathomimetics, plain

Small amounts of antiseptics etc. are allowed at each 5th level.
Combinations with antibiotics, antihistamines, ipatropium bromide etc.
are classified in R01AB, while combinations with corticosteroids are
classified in R01AD.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of acute rhinitis.
R01AB Sympathomimetics, combinations excl. corticosteroids

Combinations with e.g. antibiotics, antihistamines and ipatropium
bromide are classified in this group.
This group also includes preparations with two or more sympatho-
mimetics. These combinations are classified in a ranking according to the
ATC codes, e.g. substances classified in R01AB01 take precedence over
substances classified in R01AB02 etc.
Combinations of phenylephrine and lerimazoline are classified in
R01AB01.
Combinations of tetracaine and oxymetazoline for nasal application used
as local dental anesthetics are classified in N01BA.
213
The DDDs are based on the treatment of rhinitis. DDDs are given in
volume (i.e. ml). Most of the products classified in this group are
combinations with antihistamines. So far, all these products are given
a fixed DDD of 0.8 ml.
R01AC Antiallergic agents, excl. corticosteroids

Antihistamines, cromoglicate disodium and analogues are classified here.
Combinations with corticosteroids are classified in R01AD.
The DDD of cromoglicic acid is based on the prophylaxis of rhinitis. The
DDDs of the antihistamines are based on the maintenance treatment
of rhinitis.
R01AD Corticosteroids
Combinations of corticosteroids with antiinfectives, sympathomimetics,
antihistamines etc. are classified in this group at separate 5th levels by
Fluticasone propionate is classified in R01AD08.
The DDDs are mainly based on the starting dose in the treatment of
rhinitis.
R01AX Other nasal preparations

This group comprises antiinfectives, antiseptics, mucolytics etc. which
ATC level R01AX10 is an old level where rather obsolete nasal
preparations and sodium chloride nasal products are classified. The level
R01AX30 is for nasal combination products which cannot be classified in
Combinations of ipatropium bromide and xylometazoline are classified in
R01AB.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of rhinitis.
R01B NASAL DECONGESTANTS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

This group comprises preparations for systemic use in vasomotoric or
allergic rhinitis etc., excl. plain antihistamines (see R06).
Combinations with antihistamines are classified in this group.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of rhinitis.
214
R01BA Sympathomimetics
R02 THROAT PREPARATIONS

R02A THROAT PREPARATIONS
Throat preparations and mouth preparations are classified in the groups
R02 and A01 according to assumed main therapeutic use. Preparations
used in common minor infections of mouth and throat are classified in
R02, while preparations used in gingivitis, stomatitis etc. are classified in
A01 - Stomatological preparations.
Preparations for the treatment of symptoms both in mouth and throat are
classified in R02 - Throat preparations.
The DDDs are based on the treatment of common minor infections of
mouth and throat. For combination products, DDDs are given as fixed
doses of 6 UD (6 tablets).
R02AA Antiseptics
See also A01AB - Antiinfectives and antiseptics for local oral treatment.
At each 5th level combinations with anesthetics are allowed.
The combination dichlorobenzyl alcohol and amyl-m-cresol is classified in
R02AA03.
R02AB Antibiotics
See also A01AB - Antiinfectives and antiseptics for local oral treatment.
Combinations of antibiotics and antiseptics are classified in this group.
At each 5th level combinations with anesthetics and/or steroids are
allowed.
Antibiotics for systemic use, see J01.
R02AD Anesthetics, local
This group comprises e.g. throat lozenges containing local anesthetics.
Dental anesthetics for local application are classified in N01B - Anesthetics,
local.
Combinations of anesthetics and antiseptics/antibiotics are classified in
R02AA/R02AB respectively.
R02AX Other throat preparations
Combinations of benzydamine and cetylpyridinium are classified at the
same 5th level as benzydamine.
215
The DDD for flurbiprofen is based on lozenges and mouth spray which
have equivalent dose recommendations.
R03 DRUGS FOR OBSTRUCTIVE AIRWAY DISEASES

R03A ADRENERGICS, INHALANTS
It is complicated to decide DDDs for the different dosage forms and
even the different inhalation devices of the same dosage form. It has
been shown that certain inhalation devices give a better deposition of
the active ingredient in the lungs. This gives a better clinical effect, and
therefore the active ingredients can be used in lower dosages. It has
been decided not to take this aspect into consideration when assigning
DDDs in this group, since the picture is very complex and satisfactory
comparative documentation is not always available. Accordingly, only
one DDD is assigned for one dosage form of a substance (e.g. powder
inhalation).
For some substances, the labelling of the strength of identical
inhalation products may differ between countries. In some countries,
metered dose (measured as the amount of substance released from
the inhaler with the mouthpiece removed) is used while in other
countries delivered dose (measured as the amount of substance
released from the inhaler with the mouthpiece in place) is used in the
labelling. Delivered dose will usually be lower than metered dose. This
is important to take into considerations when linking DDD information
to the products in the different countries.
The DDDs for inhalation aerosol and inhalation powder of the same
substance are in most cases given the same DDD value. The DDDs for
inhalation solutions are, however, different from these and much
higher, partly because less amount of the active ingredient will reach
the target organ, and partly because this dosage form often is used in
more severe asthma.
R03AA Alpha- and beta-adrenoreceptor agonists

The DDDs are based on the treatment of asthma.
R03AB Non-selective beta-adrenoreceptor agonists

The DDDs are based on the treatment of asthma.
216
R03AC Selective beta-2-adrenoreceptor agonists
The DDDs are mainly based on the treatment of asthma.
The DDDs for formoterol and salmeterol inhalation powders are based
on metered dose, even though products containing these substances
could be declared as delivered dose.
The DDD for indacaterol is based on the treatment of COPD (Chronic
Obstructive Pulmonary Disease).
R03AH Combinations of adrenergics

See comments to R03AK.
R03AK Adrenergics in combination with corticosteroids or other drugs, excl.

anticholinergics
The DDDs for combination products are based on the maintenance
treatment of severe asthma or COPD (Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary
Disease). The assigned DDDs cannot always be compared with the
DDDs assigned for plain preparations. See list of DDDs for combination
products; www.whocc.no.
R03AL Adrenergics in combination with anticholinergics incl. triple

combinations with corticosteroids
R03B OTHER DRUGS FOR OBSTRUCTIVE AIRWAY DISEASES, INHALANTS

This group comprises all drugs for obstructive airway diseases for
inhalation excl. adrenergics (R03A).
See comment under R03A.
R03BA Glucocorticoids
Combinations with adrenergics are classified in R03AK.
The combination of ciclosonide and tiotropium bromide is classified in
R03BB54.
The DDDs are based on the starting dose in moderate to severe
asthma.
R03BB Anticholinergics
Combinations with adrenergics are classified in R03AL.
217
The combination of tiotropium bromide and ciclosonide is classified in
R03BB54.
The DDDs are based on the maintenance treatment of asthma.
The DDDs for tiotropium bromide and umeclidinium bromide are
based on treatment of COPD (Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease).
The DDD for tiotropium bromide inhalation powder is based on
tiotropium, delivered dose.
The DDD for aclidinium bromide inhalation powder is based on
aclidinium, delivered dose.
The DDD for glycopyrronium bromide inhalation powder is based on
glycopyrronium, delivered dose.
The DDD for umeclidinium bromide inhalation powder is based on

umeclidinium, delivered dose.
R03BC Antiallergic agents, excl. corticosteroids

The DDDs are based on the prophylaxis of asthma.
DDD for inhalation aerosol and inhalation powder differ in this group,
due to differences in dosage recommendations for these dosage forms.
R03BX Other drugs for obstructive airway diseases, inhalants
R03C ADRENERGICS FOR SYSTEMIC USE

This group comprises adrenergics for systemic use indicated for e.g.
bronchial asthma. Sympathomimetics used in the treatment of hypo-
tension, see C01CA. Fenoterol infusion only intended for repression of
labour is classified in G02CA. Combinations with xanthines are classified in
R03DB. Combinations with other anti-asthmatics are classified in R03CK -
Adrenergics and other drugs for obstructive airway diseases.
R03CA Alpha- and beta-adrenoreceptor agonists
Ephedrine injections are classified in C01CA.
R03CB Non-selective beta-adrenoreceptor agonists
Isoprenaline for systemic use is classified in this group only if bronchial
asthma is the only indication for the preparation, otherwise in
C01C - Cardiac stimulants excl. cardiac glycosides.
218
R03CC Selective beta-2-adrenoreceptor agonists
R03CK Adrenergics and other drugs for obstructive airway diseases
Combinations of adrenergics and other drugs for obstructive airway
diseases e.g. bronchial asthma and COPD (excl. xanthines, see R03DB) are
classified here.
R03D OTHER SYSTEMIC DRUGS FOR OBSTRUCTIVE AIRWAY DISEASES

Theophyllines are classified in this group. Other respiratory stimulants are
classified in R07AB - Respiratory stimulants.
Corticosteroids for systemic use, see H02.
Sympathomimetics for systemic treatment of rhinitis, see R01BA.
This group comprises mainly the xanthines. The DDDs for these
substances are based on treatment of obstructive lung diseases.
R03DA Xanthines
A number of preparations containing e.g. theophylline are classified in this
group even if they do not have asthma as an indication.
Combinations of xanthines and other agents (except adrenergics, see
R03DB - Xanthines and adrenergics) are classified at separate 5th levels
using the corresponding 50-series (e.g. mucolytics).
R03DB Xanthines and adrenergics
All combinations of xanthines and adrenergics are classified in this group.
R03DC Leukotriene receptor antagonists
Combinations with antihistamines (R06A) are classified in this group.
R03DX Other systemic drugs for obstructive airway diseases
This group comprises preparations, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
Interleukin inhibitors used in asthma are classified in this group.
R05 COUGH AND COLD PREPARATIONS

This group comprises a large number of preparations, most of which are
combined preparations.
Cold preparations containing therapeutic levels of antiinfectives should be
classified in ATC group J - Antiinfectives for systemic use.
219
Cold preparations with therapeutic levels of analgesics/anti-inflammatory
agents should be classified in the respective N02/M01 groups.
Cold preparations with both antiinfectives and analgesics should be
classified in ATC group J - Antiinfectives for systemic use.
Cold preparations with minimal amounts of analgesics are classified in
R05X - Other cold preparations.
See also R01 - Nasal preparations, R02 - Throat preparations, and
R03D - Other systemic drugs for obstructive airway diseases.
Fixed DDDs are assigned for combinations. These DDDs are based on
an average dose regimen of three times daily, and dosages in the
upper area of the recommended dose ranges are chosen. The
strengths of the various components are not taken into consideration.
E.g. 6 UD (= 30 ml) is the fixed DDD for products where the
recommended dose is 5-10 ml each time administered.
R05C EXPECTORANTS, EXCL. COMBINATIONS WITH COUGH SUPPRESSANTS

This group comprises preparations with expectorants and mucolytics.
Combined preparations are classified at separate 5th levels using the code
number 10. These may also contain e.g. antihistamines. Combinations
with adrenergics, e.g. ambroxol and clenbuterol, used in e.g. bronchial
asthma are classified in R03C - Adrenergics for systemic use.
Preparations, which contain small amounts of herbal extracts, menthol
etc., are regarded as plain preparations.
R05CA Expectorants
All combined products of expectorants are classified in R05CA10.
R05CB Mucolytics
Mesna in i.v. formulations used for the prophylaxis of urothelial toxicity is
classified in V03AF. Mesna used as a mucolytic agent (e.g. administered
by a nebuliser) is classified here.
All combined products of mucolytics are classified in R05CB10.
Combinations with xanthines are classified in R03DA.
Combinations with antiinflammatory agents are classified in M01.
For acetylcysteine, the DDD for inhalation solution is higher than for
the oral formulation, due to differences in the dosages recommended.
220
R05D COUGH SUPPRESSANTS, EXCL. COMBINATIONS WITH EXPECTORANTS
Combined preparations are classified at separate 5th levels using the code
number 20 (R05DA20 and R05DB20). These may also contain
bronchodilating agents, antihistamines etc.
Combinations with expectorants, see R05F.
Combinations with xanthines, see R03DA.
Preparations, which contain small amounts of herbal extracts, menthol
etc., are not regarded as combined preparations.
R05DA Opium alkaloids and derivatives
Plain codeine, also when used as an analgesic, is classified in this group.
Plain dihydrocodeine products, also used as cough suppressants, are
classified in N02AA.
All combined products of opium alkaloids and derivatives, are classified in
R05DA20.
Combinations with analgesics are classified in N02.
R05DB Other cough suppressants
All combined products of other cough suppressants are classified in
R05DB20.
Levocloperastine is classified together with cloperastine in R05DB21.
R05F COUGH SUPPRESSANTS AND EXPECTORANTS, COMBINATIONS

In addition to cough suppressants and expectorants, the preparations may
contain bronchodilating agents, antihistamines etc. Combinations, which
contain respiratory stimulants, e.g. theophylline, should be classified in
R03DA.
R05FA Opium derivatives and expectorants
R05FB Other cough suppressants and expectorants
R05X OTHER COLD PREPARATIONS

This group comprises cold preparations with various ingredients, which
cannot be classified in the preceding groups. Combinations with
therapeutic amounts of various ingredients (e.g. quinine as an antipyretic,
antihistamines, ascorbic acid and caffeine) are classified in this group.
Various remedies for symptomatic relief in cough and cold, e.g. inhalants
with menthol, camphora, thymol etc. are also classified here.
221
R06 ANTIHISTAMINES FOR SYSTEMIC USE
R06A ANTIHISTAMINES FOR SYSTEMIC USE
This group comprises plain and combined antihistamine preparations for
systemic use. Antihistamines used in motion sickness are classified in this
group. Other preparations used in motion sickness, see A04 - Antiemetics
and antinauseants.
See also N07C - Antivertigo preparations.
Combined preparations (incl. combinations with hydroxyzine) are
Combinations of antihistamines are classified at a separate 4th level,
R06AK.
Antihistamines are also included in combined preparations classified in
other groups:
Combinations with analgesics - N02
Combinations with xanthines - R03DA
Combinations with leukotriene receptor antagonists - R03DC.
Combinations with expectorants - R05C
Combinations with nasal decongestants for systemic use - R01B
Combinations with cough suppressants - R05D
Allergen extracts, see V01.
For some of the substances, different dosage forms are given different
DDDs, due to differences in bioavailability.
R06AA Aminoalkyl ethers

Combinations of diphenhydramine and dimenhydrinate are classified in
R06AA52 diphenhydramine, combinations.
Combinations with codeine are classified in N02AA.
Combinations of cinnarizine and dimenhydrinate (diphenhydramine
teoclate) are classified in N07CA - Antivertigo preparations.
The DDD of doxylamine is based on the treatment of insomnia.
R06AB Substituted alkylamines
222
R06AC Substituted ethylene diamines
R06AD Phenothiazine derivatives
R06AE Piperazine derivatives
Cinnarizine and flunarizine are classified in N07C - Antivertigo
preparations.
R06AK Combinations of antihistamines
R06AX Other antihistamines for systemic use
R07 OTHER RESPIRATORY SYSTEM PRODUCTS

R07A OTHER RESPIRATORY SYSTEM PRODUCTS
This group comprises lung surfactants and respiratory stimulants.
Caffeine is classified in N06B - Psychostimulants, agents used for ADHD
and nootropics. See also comments under R07AB - Respiratory stimulants.
R07AA Lung surfactants
This group comprises surface-tension lowering agents used in respiratory
distress syndrome. Combinations of different lung surfactants are
classified in R07AA30, e.g. sinapultide in combination with other lung
surfactants are classified here.
The DDDs of colfosceril palmitate and natural phospholipids are based
on the treatment of respiratory distress syndrome in neonates, and
correspond to the treatment of children weighing 1.6 kg.
R07AB Respiratory stimulants

Centrally acting respiratory stimulants mainly used for asthma and similar
respiratory diseases (e.g. theophylline) are classified in R03D. Other
respiratory stimulants are classified here. This group includes plain and
combined preparations.
Combinations with respiratory stimulants and caffeine are classified in this
group. Plain caffeine preparations are classified in
N06B - Psychostimulants, agents used for ADHD and nootropics.
This group includes various drugs used on different indications. The
DDDs are therefore established individually for each ATC 5th level.
223
R07AX Other respiratory system products
This group comprises preparations used for respiratory disorders, which
Nitric oxide is classified here, other medical gases, see V03AN.
224
S SENSORY ORGANS
S01 OPHTHALMOLOGICALS
A Antiinfectives
B Antiinflammatory agents
C Antiinflammatory agents and antiinfectives in combination
E Antiglaucoma preparations and miotics
F Mydriatics and cycloplegics
G Decongestants and antiallergics
H Local anesthetics
J Diagnostic agents
K Surgical aids
X Other ophthalmologicals
S02 OTOLOGICALS
A Antiinfectives
B Corticosteroids
C Corticosteroids and antiinfectives in combination
D Other otologicals
S03 OPHTHALMOLOGICAL AND OTOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS

A Antiinfectives
B Corticosteroids
C Corticosteroids and antiinfectives in combination
D Other ophthalmological and otological preparations
225
S SENSORY ORGANS
A formulation approved both for use in the eye/ear is classified in S03.
Formulations approved for eye, ear and nose are also classified in S03.
Formulations only licensed for use in the eye or the ear are classified in
S01 and S02, respectively.
S01 OPHTHALMOLOGICALS
Most of the drugs in this group are topical preparations. Systemic
preparations with clear ophthalmological indications are also classified in
this group.
Small amounts of antiseptics in eye preparations do not influence the
classification, e.g. benzalconium.
See also S03 - Ophthalmological and otological preparations.
DDDs have been assigned for antiglaucoma preparations only.
S01A ANTIINFECTIVES
This group comprises plain and combined antiinfective preparations for
ophthalmological use.
Combinations with corticosteroids are classified in S01CA - Corticosteroids
and antiinfectives in combination.
S01AA Antibiotics
Combinations of different antibiotics (incl. sulfonamides) are classified at a
separate 5th level: S01AA30.
Combinations with other drugs (e.g. sympathomimetics) are classified at a
separate 5th level: S01AA20.
Combinations with antiinflammatory agents are classified in group S01C.
S01AB Sulfonamides
Combinations with antibiotics are classified in S01AA.
S01AD Antivirals
S01AE Fluoroquinolones
S01AX Other antiinfectives
This group comprises antiinfective preparations for ophthalmological use,
which cannot be classified in the preceding groups. Products containing
boric acid, also in low strengths, are classified in this group.
226
Preparations containing benzalconium as the only active substance are
classified here, on the 4th level.
S01B ANTIINFLAMMATORY AGENTS

This group comprises all eye preparations with non-steroidal
antiinflammatory agents and corticosteroids, plain and combinations.
Combinations with antiinfectives are classified in S01C - Antiinflammatory
agents and antiinfectives in combination.
S01BA Corticosteroids, plain
S01BB Corticosteroids and mydriatics in combination
Combinations, which in addition contain anticholinergics, are classified
here.
Combinations, which in addition contain antiinfectives, are classified in
S01CB - Corticosteroids/antiinfectives/mydriatics in combination.
S01BC Antiinflammatory agents, non-steroids
S01C ANTIINFLAMMATORY AGENTS AND ANTIINFECTIVES IN COMBINATION

This group comprises all eye preparations, which contain corticosteroids
or non-steroidal antiinflammatory agents and antiinfectives. Preparations
may also contain additional drugs.
S01CA Corticosteroids and antiinfectives in combination
The preparations are classified according to the corticosteroid. Different
antiinfectives may occur at each 5th level.
S01CB Corticosteroids/antiinfectives/mydriatics in combination
This group is built up as S01CA.
S01CC Antiinflammatory agents, non-steroids and antiinfectives in combination
S01E ANTIGLAUCOMA PREPARATIONS AND MIOTICS

This group comprises preparations for local and systemic treatment of
glaucoma.
Drugs used for producing miosis are classified in this group, even if the
main indication is not glaucoma.
227
The DDDs are based on single dose (or single package) and
administration frequencies. A single dose is defined as two eye drops
(one in each eye) corresponding to 0.1 ml. For eye drops administered
once daily the DDD is 0.1 ml, for eye drops administered twice daily the
DDD is 0.2 ml, etc. For single use packages one dose is the volume of
one package. This also applies for combinations. In eye ointments one
dose corresponds to about 10 mm (20 mg) per eye thus corresponding
to 40 mg for both eyes.
S01EA Sympathomimetics in glaucoma therapy

Preparations containing parasympathomimetics in combination with
epinephrine, are classified in S01EB.
S01EB Parasympathomimetics
Combinations with beta blocking agents are classified in S01ED.
The DDD for pilocarpine lamellas has been obtained by dividing two
lamellas by seven days (the recommended dose is 1 lamella/
eye/week).
S01EC Carbonic anhydrase inhibitors

Carbonic anhydrase inhibitors used for different indications are classified
in this group.
Diclofenamide for treatment of periodic paralysis is classified here.
The DDDs are based on the average recommended doses in the
treatment of chronic glaucoma.
S01ED Beta blocking agents

Combinations of beta blocking agents and other drugs, e.g. pilocarpine,
are classified in this group, at separate 5th levels using the corresponding
50-series.
S01EE Prostaglandin analogues
Combinations with beta blocking agents are classified in S01ED.
Bimatoprost indicated for treatment of hypotrichosis of the eyelashes is
classified here.
S01EX Other antiglaucoma preparations
228
S01F MYDRIATICS AND CYCLOPLEGICS
S01FA Anticholinergics
Combinations with sympathomimetics are classified in this group.
Combinations with corticosteroids are classified in S01BB.
S01FB Sympathomimetics excl. antiglaucoma preparations
Phenylephrine in high strength is classified in this group, see also S01GA.
Sympathomimetics used in glaucoma therapy, see S01EA.
S01G DECONGESTANTS AND ANTIALLERGICS

This group comprises drugs used to treat symptoms of e.g. allergy.
S01GA Sympathomimetics used as decongestants
This group comprises sympathomimetics used as decongestants, plain and
in combination. E.g. low strength phenylephrine in combination with
other drugs is classified in this group. See also S01FB.
Ophthalmic solutions of oxymetazoline for the treatment of acquired
blepharoptosis are also classified in S01GA04 - oxymetazoline.
S01GX Other antiallergics
Combinations of cromoglicic acid and antihistamines are classified in
S01GX51.
S01H LOCAL ANESTHETICS

This group comprises topical drugs used as local anesthetics in the eye.
Local anesthetics for other indications are classified in N01B - Anesthetics,
local. Other exceptions, see comments to N01B.
Combinations of local anesthetics and diagnostic agents, e.g. fluorescein,
are classified in S01J.
S01HA Local anesthetics
S01J DIAGNOSTIC AGENTS

This group comprises topical drugs used for diagnosing diseases in the eye.
Mydriatics and cycloplegics used as diagnostic aids are classified in S01F.
Diagnostic agents for systemic use for ophthalmological diagnoses, e.g.
fluorescein injection, are classified in V04CX - Other diagnostic agents.
229
S01JA Colouring agents
S01JX Other ophthalmological diagnostic agents
S01K SURGICAL AIDS
This group comprises drugs used in ophthalmological surgery.
Miotics are classified in S01E - Antiglaucoma preparations and miotics.
Mydriatics and cycloplegics are classified in S01F.
S01KA Viscoelastic substances
Hyaluronic acid injection used during surgical procedures on the eye (e.g.
4-20 mg/ampoule) is classified in this group. Hyaluronic acid injection for
intra-articular administration (e.g. 2.5 mg/ampoule) used in the treatment
of arthritis is classified in M09A - Other drugs for disorders of the musculo-
skeletal system.
Hypromellose is classified in this group. Hypromellose used as artificial
tears is, however, classified in S01XA20.
S01KX Other surgical aids
Preparations containing e.g. enzymes (chymotrypsin) for use in eye
surgery, are classified in this group.
Mitomycin used in glaucoma surgery is classified in L01DC03.
S01L OCULAR VASCULAR DISORDER AGENTS

S01LA Antineovascularisation agents
S01X OTHER OPHTHALMOLOGICALS

This group comprises products, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups e.g. artificial tears, products for use with contact lenses,
drugs against cataract etc.
All products containing boric acid are classified in S01AX - Other
antiinfectives.
S01XA Other ophthalmologicals
Hypromellose is classified in S01XA20, if it is used as artificial tears. See
also S01KA.
Varenicline nasal spray used for dry eye disease is classified in this group.
230
S02 OTOLOGICALS
Small amounts of antiseptics in otological preparations do not influence
the classification, e.g. benzalconium.
See also S03 - Ophthalmological and otological preparations.
No DDDs are assigned in this group.
S02A ANTIINFECTIVES
otological use.
Combined preparations are classified at a separate 5th level - S02AA30 -
antiinfectives, combinations. This level includes combinations of different
antiinfectives and combinations of antiinfectives/other substances.
Combinations with corticosteroids are classified in S02C - Corticosteroids
S02AA Antiinfectives
Ciprofloxacin, declared as ear drops, is classified here.
S02B CORTICOSTEROIDS
This group comprises all otological preparations with corticosteroids, plain
and combinations, except combinations with antiinfectives. These are
classified in S02C - Corticosteroids and antiinfectives in combination.
S02BA Corticosteroids
S02C CORTICOSTEROIDS AND ANTIINFECTIVES IN COMBINATION

This group comprises all otological preparations, which contain
corticosteroids and antiinfectives. Preparations may also contain
additional drugs.
231
S02D OTHER OTOLOGICALS
This group comprises ear preparations, which cannot be classified in the
preceding groups.
S02DA Analgesics and anesthetics
This group comprises e.g. preparations with analgesics and/or local
anesthetics.
S02DC Indifferent preparations
This group comprises e.g. oil-preparations used to remove ear wax.
S03 OPHTHALMOLOGICAL AND OTOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS

This group comprises preparations which can be used in both eye and ear.
Formulations approved for eye, ear and nose should also be classified in
S03.
Small amounts of antiseptics (e.g. benzalconium) do not influence the
classification.
No DDDs are assigned in this group.
S03A ANTIINFECTIVES
S03AA Antiinfectives
use in eye/ear.
Combined preparations are classified at a separate 5th level, S03AA30 -
antiinfectives, combinations. This level includes combinations of different
antiinfectives and combinations of antiinfectives and other substances.
Combinations with corticosteroids are classified in S03C - Corticosteroids
S03B CORTICOSTEROIDS
This group comprises all eye/ear preparations with corticosteroids, plain
and combinations, except combinations with antiinfectives. These are
classified in S03C - Corticosteroids and antiinfectives in combination.
S03BA Corticosteroids
232
S03C CORTICOSTEROIDS AND ANTIINFECTIVES IN COMBINATION
This group comprises all eye/ear preparations which contain
corticosteroids and antiinfectives. Preparations may also contain
additional drugs.
S03D OTHER OPHTHALMOLOGICAL AND OTOLOGICAL PREPARATIONS

This group comprises eye/ear preparations, which cannot be classified in
233
V VARIOUS
V01 ALLERGENS
A Allergens
V03 ALL OTHER THERAPEUTIC PRODUCTS

A All other therapeutic products
V04 DIAGNOSTIC AGENTS

B Urine tests
C Other diagnostic agents
V06 GENERAL NUTRIENTS

A Diet formulations for treatment of obesity
B Protein supplements
C Infant formulas
D Other nutrients
V07 ALL OTHER NON-THERAPEUTIC PRODUCTS

A All other non-therapeutic products
V08 CONTRAST MEDIA

A X-ray contrast media, iodinated
B X-ray contrast media, non-iodinated
C Magnetic resonance imaging contrast media
D Ultrasound contrast media
V09 DIAGNOSTIC RADIOPHARMACEUTICALS

A Central nervous system
B Skeleton
C Renal system
D Hepatic and reticulo endothelial system
E Respiratory system
F Thyroid
G Cardiovascular system
H Inflammation and infection detection
I Tumour detection
X Other diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals
234
V10 THERAPEUTIC RADIOPHARMACEUTICALS
A Antiinflammatory agents
B Pain palliation (bone seeking agents)
X Other therapeutic radiopharmaceuticals
V20 SURGICAL DRESSINGS
235
V VARIOUS
This group comprises many different types of drugs, and assigning
DDDs are difficult. Very few DDDs are assigned in this group.
V01 ALLERGENS
V01A ALLERGENS
V01AA Allergen extracts
This group comprises preparations mainly used in hyposensitisation.
Preparations for diagnostic use, e.g. prick and scratch tests, are classified
in V04CL.
This group is divided according to type of allergen, e.g. grass pollen, tree
pollen, fungi etc. Artemisia vulgaris allergens are classified in V01AA10 -
flowers.
Oral and parenteral pharmaceutical forms are classified in the same ATC
5th level.
V03 ALL OTHER THERAPEUTIC PRODUCTS

V03A ALL OTHER THERAPEUTIC PRODUCTS
V03AB Antidotes
Sugammadex indicated for reversal of neuromuscular blockade induced by
rocuronium or vecuronium is classified here.
Hydroxocobalamine is also classified in B03BA.
Medicinal charcoal is classified in A07BA.
Atropine is classified in A03BA.
Penicillamine, which is also used in copper poisoning, is classified in
M01CC.
Silibinin, which is also used in amanita poisoning, is classified in A05BA at
the same 5th level as silymarin.
Anticholinesterases, which are used as curare antidotes, are classified in
N07AA.
Clonidine low strength tablets (e.g. 25 mcg) are classified in N02CX, even if
the indication also may be “opioid withdrawal symptoms”.
Both DL-methionine and L-methionine are included in the ATC 5th level
V03AB26 - methionine.
236
Naltrexone is classified in N07BB - Drugs used in alcohol dependence.
Combinations of oxycodone and naloxone are classified in N02AA -
Natural opium alkaloids.
Combinations of buprenorphine and naloxone are classified in N07BC -
Drugs used in opioid dependence.
V03AC Iron chelating agents
V03AE Drugs for treatment of hyperkalemia and hyperphosphatemia
Plain calcium products also used in hyperphosphatemia are classified in
A12AA.
The DDD for lanthanum carbonate is expressed as lanthanum and is
equivalent to 4.3 g lanthanum carbonate.
The DDD for ferric citrate is based on the recommended dose for
chronic kidney disease patients not on dialysis.
The DDD for patiromer calcium is based on the recommended starting
dose.
V03AF Detoxifying agents for antineoplastic treatment

Mesna in i.v. formulations used for the prophylaxis of urothelial toxicity
are classified in this group. Mesna used as a mucolytic agent (e.g.
administered by a nebuliser) is classified in R05CB.
Rasburicase is classified here, other agents (e.g. febuxostat) for treatment
of hyperuricaemia, see M04AA.
Glutathione is classified in V03AB - Antidotes.
The DDDs for calcium folinate, calcium levofolinate, sodium folinate
and sodium levofolinate are based on the combined treatment with
high doses of methotrexate.
The DDD for amifostine is based on the use as an adjunct in
antineoplastic therapy.
V03AG Drugs for treatment of hypercalcemia

Sodium cellulose phosphate is classified here.
See also M05 - Drugs for treatment of bone diseases.
Cinacalcet indicated for secondary hyperparathyroidism is classified in
H05BX.
237
V03AH Drugs for treatment of hypoglycemia
Oral preparations containing diazoxide for treatment of hypoglycemia, are
classified in this group, while parenteral preparations used for treatment
of hypertension, are classified in C02DA.
V03AK Tissue adhesives
Tissue adhesives, e.g. cyanoacrylate based adhesives (not containing
fibrinogen or other local hemostatics) are classified here.
Fibrin sealants providing hemostasis at the site of application should be
classified in B02BC.
Human fibrinogen for systemic use is classified in B02BB01.
V03AM Drugs for embolisation
V03AN Medical gases
Nitric oxide used in respiratory conditions is classified in R07AX.
V03AX Other therapeutic products
groups.
Nalfurafine and difelikefalin indicated for pruritus in chronic kidney
disease are classified here.
V03AZ Nerve depressants

Ethanol used in ablation procedures is classified here.
V04 DIAGNOSTIC AGENTS
V04B URINE TESTS
V04C OTHER DIAGNOSTIC AGENTS

V04CA Tests for diabetes
V04CB Tests for fat absorption
V04CC Tests for bile duct patency
Pancreozymin is classified in V04CK.
238
V04CD Tests for pituitary function
See also V04CM - Tests for fertility disturbances.
Metyrapone for the management of Cushing’s syndrome is also classified
in this group.
V04CE Tests for liver functional capacity
V04CF Tuberculosis diagnostics
V04CG Tests for gastric secretion
V04CH Tests for renal function and ureteral injuries
V04CJ Tests for thyreoidea function
V04CK Tests for pancreatic function
V04CK01 - secretin includes synthetic, pork, and human secretin.
V04CL Tests for allergic diseases
See also V01.
V04CM Tests for fertility disturbances
V04CX Other diagnostic agents
Aminolevulinic acid used for photodynamic diagnosis is classified in
L01XD04.
V06 GENERAL NUTRIENTS

This group comprises nutrients for oral use, incl. preparations used in
feeding with stomach tube. Solutions for parenteral nutrition are
classified in B05BA.
V06A DIET FORMULATIONS FOR TREATMENT OF OBESITY

See also A08 - Antiobesity preparations, excl. diet products.
V06AA Low-energy diets
V06B PROTEIN SUPPLEMENTS
V06C INFANT FORMULAS

This group comprises preparations used in metabolic disorders. Milk
substitutes are classified V06DF.
V06CA Nutrients without phenylalanine
239
V06D OTHER NUTRIENTS
This group comprises a major part of the general nutrients.
V06DA Carbohydrates/proteins/minerals/vitamins, combinations
V06DB Fat/carbohydrates/proteins/minerals/vitamins, combinations
V06DC Carbohydrates
V06DD Amino acids, incl. combinations with polypeptides
V06DE Amino acids/carbohydrates/minerals/vitamins, combinations
V06DF Milk substitutes
This group comprises milk substitutes used in milk allergy.
V06DX Other combinations of nutrients
V07 ALL OTHER NON-THERAPEUTIC PRODUCTS

V07A ALL OTHER NON-THERAPEUTIC PRODUCTS
This group comprises e.g. solvents, diluents and solutions for blood
transfusion products. Auxiliary products for performing medical
examinations, e.g. plain exploration creams and lubricants, are also
V07AA Plasters
Non-medicated adhesive plasters, surgical tapes etc. are classified in this
group whereas liquid plasters are classified in D02AD.
Medicated dressings are classified in D09.
V07AB Solvents and diluting agents, incl. irrigating solutions
This group comprises sterile water preparations and solvents for diluting
or dissolving active substances, e.g. allergen extracts.
Storage solutions for the preservation of organs are also classified here.
V07AC Blood transfusion, auxiliary products
Citric acid/citrate/dextrose (ACD) solutions and similar products are
V07AD Blood tests, auxiliary products
Solutions used as diluents or transport media for blood samples are
240
V07AN Incontinence equipment
V07AR Sensitivity tests, discs and tablets
E.g. antibiotic discs may be classified in this group.
V07AS Stomi equipment
V07AT Cosmetics
V07AV Technical disinfectants
V07AX Washing agents etc.
V07AY Other non-therapeutic auxiliary products
Exploration creams and lubricants are classified in this group. Creams,
which contain antiseptics, are classified in D08 - Antiseptics and
disinfectants.
Preparations used as negative contrast media in double-contrast
radiography only, containing e.g. bicarbonates or hypromellose, are
V07AZ Chemicals and reagents for analysis
V08 CONTRAST MEDIA

This group comprises X-ray, MRI and Ultrasound contrast media. The X-
ray contrast media are subdivided into iodinated and non-iodinated
compounds, and are further classified according to water solubility,
osmolarity and nephrotropic/hepatotropic properties. High osmolar
substances correspond mainly to ionic substances, except from ioxaglic
acid, which is classified together with the non-ionic substances. MRI
contrast media are subdivided according to magnetic properties.
V08A X-RAY CONTRAST MEDIA, IODINATED

V08AA Watersoluble, nephrotropic, high osmolar X-ray contrast media
V08AB Watersoluble, nephrotropic, low osmolar X-ray contrast media
V08AC Watersoluble, hepatotropic X-ray contrast media
V08AD Non-watersoluble X-ray contrast media
V08B X-RAY CONTRAST MEDIA, NON-IODINATED

V08BA Barium sulfate containing X-ray contrast media
V08C MAGNETIC RESONANCE IMAGING CONTRAST MEDIA

V08CA Paramagnetic contrast media
V08CB Superparamagnetic contrast media
241
V08CX Other magnetic resonance imaging contrast media
V08D ULTRASOUND CONTRAST MEDIA

V08DA Ultrasound contrast media
The microspheres may contain various ingredients. E.g. perflutren
suspension in microspheres of phospholipids is classfied in V08DA04.
Perflenapent covers structural isomers of dodecafluoropentane i.e.
perflisopent.
V09 DIAGNOSTIC RADIOPHARMACEUTICALS

An expert group has been responsible for the ATC classification of
radiopharmaceuticals in V09 and V10. The group has also prepared the
guidelines for classification of these products.
Radiopharmaceuticals for diagnostic use are classified in this group, while
radiopharmaceuticals for therapeutic use are classified in V10. In general,
the 3rd level are subdivided according to site of action or organ system,
the 4th level according to radionuclide and the 5th level specifies the
chemical substance. The ATC 5th level defines the actual form essential in
nuclear medicine procedures, which includes radionuclide and carrier
molecule. Therefore, products on the market, that can often be regarded
as intermediate products rather than ready-to-use radiopharmaceuticals,
can be given more than one (5th level) ATC code, e.g. technetium (99mTc)
exametazime (V09AA01) and technetium (99mTc) exametazime labelled
cells (V09HA02).
ATC codes are not assigned for radionuclide precursors which are used
only in the radiolabelling of another substance prior to administration.
No DDDs have been assigned for radiopharmaceuticals.
V09A CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM

This group comprises preparations used in CNS investigations in diagnostic
nuclear medicine.
V09AA Technetium (99mTc) compounds
V09AB Iodine (123I) compounds
V09AX Other central nervous system diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals
242
V09B SKELETON
This group comprises preparations used in bone imaging.
Radiopharmaceuticals used for the investigation of bone marrow are
classified in V09D - Hepatic and reticulo endothelial system.
V09BA Technetium (99mTc) compounds
This group comprises various technetium bisphosphonates and
pyrophosphate.
V09C RENAL SYSTEM

This group comprises preparations used for the visualisation of kidneys
and urinary tract and preparations for functional studies of the renal
system.
V09CA Technetium (99mTc) compounds
This group comprises technetium compounds given intravenously.
Technetium compounds used in aerosols for inhalation are classified in
V09E - Respiratory system.
Technetium-succimer prepared as 'pentavalent' is classified in V09I -
Tumour detection.
V09CX Other renal system diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals
V09D HEPATIC AND RETICULO ENDOTHELIAL SYSTEM

This group comprises radiopharmaceuticals used for the imaging of liver,
gall bladder, lymphatic system and bone marrow.
V09DA Technetium (99mTc) compounds
This group contains technetium iminodiacetic acid derivatives for
cholescintigraphy.
V09DB Technetium (99mTc), particles and colloids
This group contains technetium colloidal and particle containing
preparations for the scintigraphy of liver, spleen, lymphatic system and
bone marrow. Also orally administered preparations used for
gastrointestinal tract imaging (gastric emptying, reflux etc.) are classified
in this group.
243
Preparations containing larger particles that are used for lung perfusion
studies are classified in V09E - Respiratory system. Denatured labelled
erythrocytes for spleen scintigraphy are classified in V09G - Cardiovascular
system.
V09DX Other hepatic and reticulo endothelial system diagnostic
radiopharmaceuticals
V09E RESPIRATORY SYSTEM

This group comprises radiopharmaceuticals for the lung ventilation and
lung perfusion studies.
V09EA Technetium (99mTc), inhalants
Technetium preparations for inhalation are classified in this group.
Preparations with other indications when given intraveneously are
classified according to such indications, e.g. technetium-pentetate is
classified in V09C - Renal system.
V09EB Technetium (99mTc), particles for injection
Preparations containing smaller particles or colloids that are used for RES
function are classified in V09D - Hepatic and reticulo endothelial system.
V09EX Other respiratory system diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals
V09F THYROID
This group comprises radiopharmaceuticals used for thyroid imaging.
Thalliumchloride and technetium-sestamibi used for parathyroid imaging
are classified in V09G - Cardiovascular system.
V09FX Various thyroid diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals
Technetium-pertechnetate used for the scintigraphy of salivary glands and
Meckels diverticulum is classified in this group. Technetium-pentavalent
succimer used in medullary thyroid carcinoma is classified in V09I -
Tumour detection. Sodium iodide (131I) in low dose is classified here.
Sodium iodide (131I) in high dose for therapy is classified in V10X - Other
therapeutic radiopharmaceuticals.
V09G CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM

This group comprises radiopharmaceuticals for myocardial scintigraphy,
ejection fraction measurements, and vascular disorders.
244
V09GA Technetium (99mTc) compounds
Labelled cells (erythrocytes) for the investigation of cardiovascular
function are classified in this group. No subdivision is made for in vitro or
in vivo labelling. Pertechnetate for thyroid imaging is classified in V09F -
Thyroid.
V09GB Iodine (125I) compounds
V09GX Other cardiovascular system diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals
V09H INFLAMMATION AND INFECTION DETECTION

This group comprises agents for the detection of inflammation and
infection. Labelled blood cells are classified in this group. Agents that are
used for the labelling of these cells can also be classified elsewhere, e.g.
technetium-exametazime is classified in V09A -Central Nervous System.
No subdivision is made for the type of labelled cells (erythrocytes,
granulocytes or autologous etc.).
V09HA Technetium (99mTc) compounds
V09HB Indium (111In) compounds
V09HX Other diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals for inflammation and infection
detection
V09I TUMOUR DETECTION

This group comprises monoclonal antibodies and other compounds used
for tumour detection.
V09IA Technetium (99mTc) compounds
V09IB Indium (111In) compounds
V09IX Other diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals for tumour detection
Gallium-citrate used for non-specific tumour localisation is classified in
V09H - Inflammation and infection detection. Thallium-chloride used for
tumour detection is classified in V09G - Cardiovascular system.
Iobenguane (131I) in low dose is classified here while high dose for therapy
is classified in V10X - Other therapeutic radiopharmaceuticals.
245
V09X OTHER DIAGNOSTIC RADIOPHARMACEUTICALS
This group contains various diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals which cannot
V09XA Iodine (131I) compounds
V09XX Various diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals
V10 THERAPEUTIC RADIOPHARMACEUTICALS

Radiopharmaceuticals for therapeutic use are classified in this group,
while radiopharmaceuticals for diagnostic use are classified in V09 -
Diagnostic radiopharmaceuticals. Radiopharmaceuticals for cancer
treatment are classified in V10X.
See comments to V09.
V10A ANTIINFLAMMATORY AGENTS

This group comprises radiopharmaceuticals for the therapy of
inflammatory processes.
V10AA Yttrium (90Y) compounds
In this group yttrium colloidal preparations used for radiation
synovectomy are classified.
V10AX Other antiinflammatory therapeutic radiopharmaceuticals
This group comprises non-yttrium particulate radiopharmaceuticals for
radiation synovectomy and intracavitary instillation.
V10B PAIN PALLIATION (BONE SEEKING AGENTS)

This group comprises therapeutic radiopharmaceuticals used for pain
palliation in bone malignancies.
V10BX Various pain palliation radiopharmaceuticals
V10X OTHER THERAPEUTIC RADIOPHARMACEUTICALS

This group contains various therapeutic radiopharmaceuticals which
V10XA Iodine (131I) compounds
Sodium iodide (131I) in low dose for diagnostic nuclear medicine is
classified in V09F - Thyroid.
246
Iobenguane (131I) in low dose for diagnostic nuclear medicine is classified
in V09I - Tumour detection.
V10XX Various therapeutic radiopharmaceuticals
Radiopharmaceuticals for cancer treatment and various therapeutic
radiopharmaceuticals which cannot be classified in the preceding groups
V20 SURGICAL DRESSINGS

A detailed classification of surgical dressings is prepared and maintained
by the Ministry of Defence in the UK.
247
List of terms:
AC-system Anatomical Classification developed by the EphMRA.

ATC classification Anatomical Therapeutic Chemical classification system.
ATC herbal classification ATC classification for herbal remedies.
ATCvet classification ATC classification for veterinary products.
ATC levels The ATC system is divided in 5 different levels.
1st level: 14 anatomical groups
2nd level: Pharmacological/therapeutic/ subgroup
3rd and 4th level: Chemical/pharmacological/therapeutic
subgroups
5th level: Chemical substance.
Average adult dose The dose used for the main indication which reflects the ATC
code. When referred to body weight, an adult is considered to
be a person of 70 kg. The DDDs are as a main rule based on the
average adult dose.
BAN British Approved Name.
5th level codes 20 and 30 5th level codes used for combined preparations containing two
or more active ingredients belonging to the same 4th level.
5th level codes - 50-series Combination products containing two or more active
components not belonging to the same 4th level are classified
by using 50- series.
5th level codes - 70 series Combination products containing psycholeptic drugs, which are
not classified under N05 or N06 are classified at separate 5th
levels using the 70-series corresponding to the ATC-
classification of the main component.
Combination products Products containing two or more active ingredients.
DDD Defined Daily Dose - a technical unit of measurement defined
as the assumed average maintenance dose per day for a drug
used for its main indication in adults.
DDDs/1000 inhabitants/day Data presented as such provide a rough estimate of the
proportion of the population within a defined area treated daily
with certain drugs.
DDDs per 100 bed days Applied when in-hospital drug use is considered. E.g. 100 DDD
per 100 bed days indicates that for instance 20 persons get a
certain treatment for 5 days.
DDDs per inhabitant per year Often used for antiinfectives or other drugs normally used in
short periods. E.g. 5 DDDs/inhabitant/year indicate that every
inhabitant on average is treated with a 5 days course a year.
248
DURG Drug Utilization Research Group.
EphMRA European Pharmaceutical Market Research Association.
Fixed dose DDDs based on the average use for preparations within a group
without considering and comparing the strengths of the
different preparations.
INN International nonproprietary names. The preferred substance
name in the ATC-system.
Intermittent dosing In therapeutic groups e.g. hormones, where many of the
preparations are administered intermittently, the dose
administered is divided by the number of days in the treatment
period to obtain the average daily dose.
Maintenance dose The dose preferred when establishing the DDD. Some drugs are
used in different initial doses but this is not reflected in the
DDD.
“Other” group 3rd or 4th level, often named X, used for substances not clearly
belonging to any existing ATC 3rd or 4th level.
PBIRG Pharmaceutical Business Intelligence and Research Group
PDD The Prescribed Daily Dose for a substance is determined from
prescription studies, medical- or pharmacy records and patient
interviews. The PDD must be related to the diagnosis on which
the dosage is based.
Plain product Products containing one active component.
U Unit, both international as well as others.
UD The unit dose is used when a DDD for various reasons cannot
be given in amount of active ingredient.
USAN United States Adopted Name.
WHO Collaborating Centre The centre responsible for the development and
for Drug Statistics maintenance of the ATC/DDD system.
Methodology
WHO Collaborating Centre A collaborating centre situated in Uppsala, Sweden,
for International Drug which receives spontaneous reports of suspected
Monitoring adverse reactions from national centres and carries the
operational responsibilities for WHO´s programme on
International Monitoring.
249
WHO Drug Information Published by WHO 4 times a year to bring issues of primary
concern to drug regulators and pharmaceutical manufacturers
to the attention of a wide audience of health professionals and
policy-makers concerned with the rational use of drugs.
Publishes the new ATC codes/DDD approved at the working
group meetings. Can be ordered from:
Marketing and Dissemination, World Health Organization,
1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland,
Email: publications@who.int
WHO International Working WHO appointed experts in medicine and statistics
Group for Drug Statistics who advise the collaborating centre in the
Methodology assignment of ATC/DDD and carries out research into the use of
these methodologies in drug utilization. The Working Group
meets two times a year, normally March and October.
250

2023 - Guidelines - For ATC Classification & DDD Assignment PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 - Guidelines - For ATC Classification & DDD Assignment PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 - Guidelines - For ATC Classification & DDD Assignment PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guidelines for

Suggested citation: WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology,

WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology

Telephone: (47) 21078160

Oslo, December 2022

WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology

Gry Vibeke Bakken, MScPharm, PhD

II. The anatomical therapeutic chemical (ATC) classification system ...... 14

III. DDD (Defined Daily Dose) .................................................................. 23

IV. Uses of the ATC/DDD methodology ................................................... 32

V. Procedures and data requirements for ATC/DDD assignment and

VI. Description of ATC index with DDDs .................................................. 47

VII. Other ATC classification systems ....................................................... 48

VIII. ATC/DDD Interpretative guidelines ................................................... 49

B Blood and blood forming organs ........................................................... 81

C Cardiovascular system .......................................................................... 91

D Dermatologicals .................................................................................. 113

G Genito urinary system and sex hormones ........................................... 129

J Antiinfectives for systemic use............................................................ 149

L Antineoplastic and immunomodulating agents................................... 166

M Musculo-skeletal system ..................................................................... 176

N Nervous system .................................................................................. 185

P Antiparasitic products, insecticides and repellents ............................. 205

R Respiratory system ............................................................................. 212

S Sensory organs .................................................................................... 225

V Various ................................................................................................ 234

List of terms .............................................................................................. 248

A. History of the ATC/DDD system

In order to measure drug use, it is important to have both a classification system

Several decades of experience using ATC/DDD methodology have demonstrated

B. Present Organizational responsibility for the ATC/DDD system

1. WHO Collaborating Centre for Drug Statistics Methodology

Access to standardised and validated information on drug use is essential to allow

2. WHO International Working Group for Drug Statistics Methodology

- To develop further the use of the ATC/DDD system as an international standard

- To revise as necessary the procedures for applications for assignment of and

- To assess the sources and availability of statistics on drug use internationally,

- To work with groups involved in rational drug use initiatives to integrate

The International Working Group meets twice annually. A teleconference may

Decisions on ATC classification or DDD assignment from the meetings are

Anyone with a legitimate interest in the Anatomical Therapeutic Chemical (ATC)

The open session is not intended to be used as a mechanism to challenge the

II. THE ANATOMICAL THERAPEUTIC CHEMICAL (ATC)

A. Structure and nomenclature

A Alimentary tract and metabolism

A10 Drugs used in diabetes

A10B Blood glucose lowering drugs, excl. insulins

B. Inclusion and exclusion criteria

- existing well defined chemical entities with an approved marketing

- herbal medicinal products assessed and approved by regulatory authorities

Other medicinal products are considered on a case by case basis. Preparations

C. Principles for classification

1. Therapeutic use or pharmacological class

Medicinal substances are classified according to the main therapeutic use or

A pharmaceutical product may be approved for two or more equally important

Cross-references will be given in the guidelines to indicate the various uses of

3. More than one ATC code for a medicinal substance